Home Tutorials and training All software Plugins and addons Send a message to us Frequently Asked Questions Payment information Discounts for regular clients
advanced

Software Catalog

Cheap tutorials download

Video training for software 

 

In Acrobat X: Creating Forms, author Claudia McCue shows how to design a form from scratch in Word, Illustrator, or InDesign—or from an existing electronic document. The course shows how to add interactive fields like check boxes, buttons, drop-down lists, and digital signature fields; how to add field calculations like sum or average; and how to use JavaScript for more advanced calculations. The course also covers how to enable forms for Acrobat Reader users, add security to a form, distribute it via email or the web, and collect data from recipients. Exercise files are included with the course.
Topics include:
* Designing forms in multiple applications
* Creating and editing fields
* Using auto-recognition
* Adding buttons and check boxes
* Creating and adding artwork
* Performing math in a form
* Creating an order form
* Securing forms with passwords and digital signatures
* Distributing forms via email or Acrobat.com

$30

Content:

Introduction 01m 32s
Welcome 00m 53s
Using the exercise files 00m 39s
1. Designing Forms 30m 37s
Choosing a design application 01m 31s
Designing forms in Word 07m 32s
Designing forms in Illustrator 05m 50s
Designing forms in InDesign 11m 27s
Looking at a finished PDF 01m 39s
Enabling Reader users 02m 38s
2. Creating and Editing Form Fields 01h 20m
Using auto-recognition 02m 36s
Understanding fields 04m 32s
Designing for neatness 04m 51s
Creating text fields 09m 08s
Creating check boxes 04m 19s
Creating radio buttons 04m 21s
Creating list boxes 03m 39s
Creating dropdown boxes 01m 43s
Introducing buttons 02m 19s
Controlling button appearance 04m 21s
Creating artwork in Photoshop 02m 58s
Creating artwork in Illustrator 05m 01s
Creating artwork in InDesign 03m 06s
Activating buttons 03m 40s
Using show/hide fields 07m 45s
Creating signature fields 02m 48s
Duplicating fields 03m 04s
Multiple fields 03m 06s
Editing forms 05m 12s
Reading barcodes 02m 14s
3. Performing Math 13m 23s
Introducing math operators 05m 05s
Creating an order form 03m 41s
Calculating sales tax with JavaScript 04m 37s
4. Securing Forms 09m 37s
Setting passwords 04m 27s
Creating digital signature security 05m 10s
5. Distributing and Managing 09m 36s
Reducing file size 01m 17s
Distributing with email 03m 13s
Distributing with Acrobat.com 03m 10s
Managing data with Excel 01m 56s
Conclusion 02m 19s
Next steps 02m 19s

In Acrobat X Tips and Tricks, Anne-Marie Concepción uses her intimate knowledge of Acrobat to reveal the application's hidden gems. The course goes beyond the manual to reveal the secret techniques of Acrobat power users: editing text and graphics directly within the PDF, adding the Typewriter tool to the toolbar, creating a better default preview for portfolios, outputting double-sided pages and printer spread booklets, and converting JavaScript into one-click actions. These tools can be put to use immediately on the PDFs that users receive and distribute every day. Exercise files are included with the course.
Topics include:
* Discovering secret toolbars
* Hiding the superfluous form bar
* Mastering the Typewriter and Text Box tools
* Importing new artwork into an existing PDF
* Creating quick and useful signature stamps
* Making PDF portfolios backward compatible
* Searching text in a scanned PDF
* Decreasing PDF file size for faster downloading
* Creating a batch action with hot folders

$30

Content:

Introduction 01m 38s
Welcome 00m 53s
Using the exercise files 00m 45s
1. Interface Fixes 27m 18s
Making a PDF of the Help file 03m 28s
Locating your favorite tools in the new Acrobat X interface 06m 16s
Customizing the toolbars 04m 16s
Discovering the secrets of the Quick Tools bar 04m 49s
Finding the most useful secret toolbar 04m 54s
Locating the missing Create a New... command 03m 35s
2. Better Ways to Zoom and View 11m 32s
Faster zooming with the Loupe tool 04m 14s
Creating and viewing facing pages 03m 02s
Viewing splits 04m 16s
3. Modifying PDF Content 59m 05s
Editing existing text 07m 08s
Creating client-editable PDFs 08m 43s
Adding text with the Typewriter tool 05m 54s
Adding text with the Text Box tool 06m 18s
Erasing private info 06m 51s
Scaling and cropping images 03m 02s
Checking and changing image resolution 04m 34s
Updating content without losing buttons and links 07m 25s
Increasing page size 04m 49s
Converting color to grayscale 04m 21s
4. Repurposing PDF Content 13m 28s
Extracting text without tears 08m 44s
Extracting images and graphics to use elsewhere 04m 44s
5. Printing Tricks 28m 07s
Printing double-sided pages 04m 24s
Printing posters and banners 05m 35s
Scaling and resizing PDFs to your paper size 12m 19s
Printing a booklet 05m 49s
6. Portfolio Tricks 16m 59s
Making a friendlier cover sheet 05m 23s
Changing the cover sheet for all portfolios 06m 04s
Forcing a sort order 01m 25s
Editing Acrobat 9 portfolios in Acrobat X 04m 07s
7. Signing PDFs 12m 27s
Creating signature stamps for casual signing 07m 29s
Creating simple secure signatures 04m 58s
8. Form Tips and Tricks 43m 38s
Getting rid of the purple bar 01m 59s
Designing forms that Acrobat can convert 08m 47s
Creating interactive form fields in InDesign 06m 04s
Converting a form to a regular PDF 03m 48s
Flattening a form 03m 59s
Filling out a flat (not interactive) form 07m 43s
Updating a form field without redoing the fields 05m 22s
Enabling and customizing Auto-Complete 02m 35s
Creating a form that lets Reader users save their data 03m 21s
9. Mastering Comments 09m 11s
Printing comments 02m 54s
Exporting comments to Microsoft Word 06m 17s
10. Power Searching 08m 55s
Searching a scanned PDF 02m 45s
Highlighting all found text in your PDF 06m 10s
11. Action Tips 11m 40s
Creating a batch action with hot folders 05m 15s
Converting JavaScript to Actions 06m 25s
12. Making Better PDFs for Reader Users 26m 17s
Building smaller PDFs with the same content 08m 04s
Making PDFs open to a useful view 06m 11s
Making shortcuts with smart bookmarks 04m 41s
Testing font embedding for true previews 04m 43s
Enabling full commenting tools for Reader 02m 38s
Conclusion 03m 43s
Next steps 03m 43s

In Acrobat X Essential Training, author Anne-Marie Concepción demonstrates how to create, modify, review, and share PDFs in Adobe Acrobat X. Starting with a tour of the new panels-based interface, the course covers the basics of the software, such as creating and customizing PDFs, searching, editing text and graphics, and extracting PDF content to use in other programs. Also included are tutorials on creating forms, inserting interactivity and rich media, using the prepress tools, combining PDFs with other types of files to create customized portfolios, and ensuring document security. Exercise files accompany the course.
Topics include:
* Creating PDFs from web pages, Office files, and Creative Suite files
* Signing PDFs with a digital signature
* Creating interactive forms
* Annotating PDFs with comments
* Collaborating with others using PDF reviews
* Making scanned documents searchable with OCR
* Preparing documents for print with print production tools
* Automating routine tasks with Actions
* Securing PDFs with encryption and password-protection
* Removing sensitive content with the Redaction feature
* Sharing PDFs
* Using the new features in Reader X and Acrobat.com

$30

Content:

Introduction 01:53
Welcome 01:33
Using the exercise files 00:20
1. Getting Started 55:00
Opening documents and moving them around 06:03
Working with the toolbars 05:59
Working with the panels 03:43
Customizing the toolbar with Quick Tools 04:40
Using the Pages panel to navigate 03:57
Selecting and copying text and graphics 03:24
Rotating pages 04:49
Changing the viewing options 06:12
Reviewing preferences 07:06
Finding words and phrases 02:35
Searching a PDF and working with the Search panel 04:21
Sharing PDFs by email and with Adobe SendNow 02:11
2. Creating PDFs 33:18
Creating PDFs from Microsoft Office applications 09:46
Creating PDFs from Creative Suite applications 08:57
Creating PDFs from within Acrobat Pro 04:27
Creating PDFs from a web site 08:22
Creating PDFs from the clipboard 01:46
3. Editing PDF Content 30:58
Editing text 08:51
Adding text 04:40
Editing images and graphics 03:39
Changing the page number display 03:48
Digitally signing PDFs 06:26
Cropping pages and documents 03:34
4. Enhancing PDFs 01:06:55
Adding watermarks 06:17
Adding page backgrounds 05:41
Adding page numbers 05:56
Adding headers and footers 09:07
Adding bookmarks 11:30
Attaching files to a PDF 07:11
Adding metadata 03:45
Optimizing a PDF for file size and compatibility 10:12
Creating initial view settings 07:16
5. Adding Rich Media and Interactivity 37:59
Adding hyperlinks to URLs 07:33
Creating links with the Link tool 06:09
Working with interactive actions 06:56
Creating and adding buttons 06:28
Adding video, sound, and SWF files 07:29
Adding page transitions 03:24
6. Combining and Rearranging PDFs 27:12
Extracting pages 03:53
Splitting a PDF into multiple files 04:13
Inserting pages from files and other sources 05:42
Moving, copying, and replacing pages 08:17
Combining PDFs 05:07
7. Extracting and Converting Content 27:09
Exporting text 08:33
Exporting images 06:33
Exporting PDFs to Microsoft Word 07:21
Exporting PDFs to Microsoft Excel 04:42
8. Creating and Working with Portfolios 26:27
Working with portfolios 06:57
Creating portfolios 06:26
Customizing portfolios 07:23
Optimizing backward compatibility 05:41
9. Getting Started with Forms 32:09
Creating an interactive form 06:42
Working with form fields 06:41
Editing field properties 05:34
Distributing and collecting forms 09:43
Enabling Reader to save form data 03:29
10. Working with Comments in PDFs 34:26
Adding sticky notes and other annotations 09:02
Using the drawing markup tools 06:10
Viewing, filtering, and replying to comments 05:24
Printing, summarizing, and exporting comments 06:35
Exporting comments to Word for Windows 03:28
Enabling extended commenting in Acrobat Reader 03:47
11. Managing PDF Reviews 25:29
Understanding the different review processes 02:07
Using the email review process 04:33
Conducting a shared review with Acrobat.com 06:54
Using the Review Tracker 04:32
Using the Collaborate Live review process 07:23
12. Preflighting and Print Production 31:02
Reviewing the print production tools 05:18
Previewing color separations 03:51
Using the Object Inspector to learn details 03:13
Working with the Preflight dialog box 05:34
Fixing hairlines 03:57
Converting colors 02:27
Saving as a standards-compliant PDF 06:42
13. Scanning and Optical Character Recognition (OCR) 19:16
Scanning a paper document to PDF 04:44
Setting up optimization options 06:48
Recognizing text in a scanned PDF 04:43
Reviewing and correcting OCR suspects 03:01
14. Automating Routine Tasks 17:18
Using the built-in Actions for automation 05:32
Editing Actions 04:07
Creating new Actions 04:51
Sharing Actions with others 02:48
15. Protecting and Securing PDFs 35:27
Choosing a security method 05:27
Password-protecting a PDF 07:28
Securing a PDF with a certificate 05:06
Creating a digital id 05:43
Removing sensitive content with the Redaction feature 06:52
Revealing and clearing hidden information 04:51
16. Adobe Reader X and Acrobat.com 33:45
Opening and navigating PDFs in Reader 07:30
Adding comments 03:14
Viewing extended features 06:53
Digitally signing a PDF 06:15
Sharing PDFs 02:29
Using Acrobat.com 07:24
Conclusion 03:54
Final thoughts 03:54

Total Training for Adobe Acrobat X Pro: Essentials online training will teach you the skills you need to master this new version of Adobe's powerful document management software.
The interface for Acrobat 10 has been completely redesigned. This training series will introduce both new and experienced users to the most effective ways to create, edit and distribute PDF documents using the new interface. New users will get a comprehensive view of the entire process of creating and working with PDF documents. Experienced users will get a road map from an expert user to locate where all the vital features have been moved.
By the time you are done watching this training series you will know and be proficient creating, editing and distributing PDF documents, creating and editing interactive PDF forms, adding hyperlinks and interactivity to PDF documents, as well as creating effective PDF comment and review procedures.
Highlights
Five New Features covered in this title:
1. Explore the Redesigned Interface
2. Discover the New Portfolio creation interface
3. Share documents and forms using Acrobat.com
4. Export content to other formats
5. Learn to use QuickTools and workspace customization

$30

Content:

Chapter 1: INTRODUCING THE ACROBAT INTERFACE (33 min)
1. A Tour of the Acrobat X Interface
2. Toolbar Overview
3. Customizing the User Interface
4. Navigation & Command Panes Overview
5. Page Displays
6. Using Full Screen Mode
7. Accessing the Adobe Help System
8. Acrobat Preferences
Chapter 2: WORKING WITH PDF DOCUMENTS (58 min)
1. Navigating PDFs Using Toolbars & Page Thumbnails
2. Selecting & Copying Text & Images
3. Creating & Editing Bookmarks
4. Working with PDF Forms
5. Searching PDFs
6. Creating Indexes
7. Exporting PDF Content t Dierent Formats
8. Printing PDFs
Chapter 3: CREATING PDF DOCUMENTS (84 min)
1. Printing to PDF in Windows®
2. Saving a Microsoft Word Document as a PDF
3. Converting Files to PDF
4. Creating a PDF from a Scanner
5. Performing OCR on Scanned Text
6. Using Acrobat Distiller®
7. Combining Files into a Single PDF
8. Creating PDF Portfolios
9. Customizing PDF Portfolios
10. Capturing Web Pages as PDF Documents
11. Selecting a PDF Output Setting
12. Editing PDF Document Settings
13. Image Compression Tips
14. Fonts & Font Embedding
15. Color, Advanced, & Standards Settings
16. Spot Colors & The Ink Manager
Chapter 4: PDF DOCUMENTS IN MICROSOFT® OFFICE 2010 (25 min)
1. Using PDFMaker in Word
2. Using PDFMaker in Excel®
3. Using PDFMaker in PowerPoint®
Chapter 5: MANIPULATING PDF DOCUMENTS (105 min)
1. Inserting, Deleting, Replacing, & Extracting Pages
2. Adding Headers & Footers
3. Adding Background Images & Watermarks
4. Adding Hyperlinks
5. Adding Movies & Flash Components
6. Adding Navigation Elements
7. Adding Page Transitions to an Interactive Slide Show
8. Editing Text & Graphics
9. Comparing Two PDF Documents
10. Redacting PDF Content
Chapter 6: CREATING PDF FORMS (103 min)
1. Converting a PDF to a Fillable Form
2. Creating a Form from a Scanned Document
3. Creating Text Fields
4. Adding Check Boxes & Radio Buttons
5. Creating a List Box
6. Setting Up Calculation Fields
7. Adding a Submit Button
8. Adding a Reset Button
9. Using PDF Forms in Adobe Reader
10. Distributing Forms via Email
11. Distributing Forms via Acrobat.com
12. Tracking Responses
13. Exporting Form Data to Dierent Formats
14. Setting Tab Order in PDF Forms
Chapter 7: ADDING SIGNATURES & SECURITY (29 min)
1. Creating a Digital ID
2. Signing PDF Documents Digitally
3. Securing PDF Documents with Passwords
4. Securing PDF Documents with a Digital Certication
Chapter 8: COMMENTING & REVIEW (37 min)
1. Using the Text Commenting Tools
2. Using the Drawing Commenting Tools
3. Working with Comments
4. Sending a Document for Review
5. Working with Review Tracker
6. Enabling Usage Rights in Adobe Reader
7. Exporting & Importing Comments
8. Credits

 

Join Ray Villalobos in this course, Fireworks CS6 Essential Training, as he shows how to create custom web graphics and web site mockups with Adobe Fireworks CS6. The initial chapters explain the basics: how to get around in the interface and create and organize documents. The course proceeds to cover all the essential drawing features in Fireworks, from drawing simple lines and shapes to applying fills, strokes, and opacity values to objects. The course also covers how to move, scale, and otherwise
transform text and images as well as create symbols, use sprites, and integrate CSS and jQuery Mobile.
Topics include:
* Working with the menus, panels, and object properties
* Saving and exporting files
* Optimizing graphics
* Applying opacity, blending modes, and live filters to drawing objects
* Drawing vector shapes
* Masking objects
* Animating with states
* Using the 9-slice scaling tool
* Creating symbols and symbols for sprites
* Using batch commands
* Creating jQuery Mobile templates

$30

Content:

Adobe Fireworks 1m 19s
What is Fireworks? 1m 19s
Introduction 2m 50s
Welcome 1m 23s
Using the exercise files 1m 27s
1. Understanding the Interface 13m 15s
Learning Fireworks menus and shortcuts 1m 24s
Getting around your document and the Application bar 4m 6s
Working with panels 2m 14s
Using the Tools panel 2m 34s
Working with the Properties panel 2m 57s
2. Working with Files 21m 30s
Opening documents and setting up the workspace 3m 28s
Organizing documents 3m 6s
Importing graphics 4m 23s
Saving and exporting files 4m 18s
Optimizing and previewing graphics 6m 15s
3. Drawing with Fireworks 58m 14s
Setting up rulers, guides, and grids 7m 16s
Drawing lines and shapes 7m 30s
Selecting and grouping objects 5m 25s
Applying fills 9m 40s
Styling strokes 4m 59s
Applying opacity, blending modes, and Live Filters 6m 23s
Using styles 5m 20s
Styling with patterns and textures 1m 47s
Drawing vector shapes 7m 28s
Working with freeform tools and reshaping vector objects 2m 26s
4. Working with Objects 1h 10m
Working with bitmaps 10m 55s
Working with text 9m 38s
Aligning and distributing elements 7m 9s
Transforming objects 3m 22s
Moving, cloning, and duplicating 6m 5s
Reshaping with the Path panel 12m 15s
Masking objects 9m 10s
Animating objects with states 6m 33s
Using the 9-Slice Scaling tool 5m 26s
5. Organizing Documents 27m 46s
Working with layers 9m 30s
Working with pages 9m 39s
Working with Web Layers 8m 37s
6. Using Symbols 29m 39s
Creating graphic symbols 5m 41s
Creating 9-slice scaling symbols 4m 0s
Creating button symbols 7m 6s
Creating animation symbols 7m 45s
Using the Common Library 5m 7s
7. Enhancing Fireworks 27m 39s
Creating component symbols 5m 31s
Working with the Commands menu 3m 24s
Adding extensions 7m 23s
Creating commands with the History panel 4m 20s
Using batch commands 7m 1s
8. Using Sprites 24m 18s
Understanding sprites 4m 31s
Creating symbols for sprites 11m 12s
Exporting sprite CSS 8m 35s
9. CSS Integration 13m 45s
Using CSS tools in the Object panel 7m 18s
Working with the CSS Properties panel 6m 27s
10. jQuery Mobile 30m 4s
What is jQuery Mobile? 8m 46s
Creating a jQuery Mobile template in Fireworks 12m 31s
Working with a jQuery Mobile template 8m 47s
Conclusion 1m 32s
Next steps 1m 32s

Fireworks CS6 is the latest iteration of Adobe's powerful web graphics and rapid interactive prototyping tool, and in this course Adobe Community Professional Tom Green gives you an overview of the Fireworks interface, the formats it can output, and its various imaging tools. Along the way you'll see how Fireworks integrates with Adobe Edge, Dreamweaver CS6, and other tools in the Adobe Master Collection. Using a project-based approach to the techniques presented, this course will help you understand where Fireworks fits into the workflow for digital media projects ranging from simple web page prototyping to interface design for rich Internet applications.

$30

Content:

Introducing Fireworks
Getting to Know Fireworks CS6
01:50
About the Project Files
00:45
The Fireworks Interface
Creating a New Document
07:35
Touring the Interface
07:45
Using the Document Tabs
04:48
Guides, Grids, and Rulers
05:19
The Fireworks Panels
03:32
Pages
04:01
Layers
05:57
States
03:13
Properties
04:10
Preferences
05:40
Vector Drawing in Fireworks
Drawing Shapes
07:42
Creating Gradients
04:01
Using Auto Shapes
04:55
Working with Color
07:04
Using Textures and Patterns
04:13
Creating Compound Shapes
04:48
Applying Filters
04:17
Project: Create an Alternate Interface for the FWUser Site (Part 1)
06:24
Project: Create an Alternate Interface for the FWUser Site (Part 2)
07:37
Working with Bitmaps
Importing
07:56
Scaling
06:06
9-Slice Scaling
06:48
Cropping
04:58
Making Selections
07:41
Drawing Tools
06:18
The Rubber Stamp Tool
05:30
Project: Create a Banner Image
05:51
Image Retouching and Color Correction
Removing Image Artifacts
04:27
Levels and Curves
04:54
Removing a Color Cast
03:00
Unsharp Masking
04:22
Project: Correct a Hawaiian Shirt
05:06
Masking in Fireworks
Creating a Vector Mask
07:58
Auto Vector Masking
02:49
Creating a Bitmap Mask
05:06
Creating a Text Mask
03:39
Other Masking Techniques
03:16
Project: Build a Banner Ad
08:16
Working with Text
Text Properties
10:36
Using Text
03:06
Putting Text on a Path
04:49
Flowing Text
02:46
Special Characters
03:01
Text Effects
06:03
Project: Create Neon Text
07:43
Creating Symbols in Fireworks
What Is a Symbol?
07:13
Creating a Graphic Symbol
03:54
Creating a Button Symbol
06:24
Creating an Animation Symbol
05:23
Working with Components
05:30
Symbols and the Common Library
03:27
Project: Build a Home Page
06:23
Wireframing
What Is Wireframing?
03:45
Using Fireworks Grids
06:05
Creating Wireframe Symbols
06:12
Adding a Fireworks Extension
04:19
Project: Wireframing a Prototype
05:09
Creating for Edge and Mobile
Preparing for Edge
05:59
Using Sprite Sheets
07:01
Batch Processing in Fireworks
04:28
Optimizing Images in Fireworks
08:29
Using the CSS Properties Panel
05:57
Introduction to the JQuery Extension
09:36
Creating a Custom JQuery Theme
09:58
Applying a Custom JQuery Theme
05:54
The Endgame
Creating Hotspots
04:04
Slicing
09:50
Creating Shared Layers
02:53
Export Options
05:27
Importing Photoshop Documents
03:58
Importing Illustrator Documents
04:02
The Fireworks Export Wizard
05:48
Fireworks and Adobe Bridge
05:04

 

This course provides a solid foundation in Adobe Flash Professional CS6 and shows how to create an assortment of Flash content. Author Anastasia McCune explains the different destinations for Flash projects—mobile devices, the desktop, or the web—and where ActionScript fits into it all. She shows how to create a new project, structure document layers and arrange objects on the Timeline, and how to get started drawing basic shapes and incorporate text, images, audio, and video. The course also explains the different types of symbols and tweens in Flash, and how to use them to build and animate content. The final chapters outline the publishing options available for Flash projects, including Adobe AIR.
Topics include:
* Choosing a document type
* Working with panels and workspaces
* Importing bitmap and vector graphics into a project
* Understanding the Timeline and frame rate
* Defining frames and keyframes
* Creating button, graphic, and movie clip symbols
* Nesting timelines
* Building shape tweens and motion tweens
* Defining inverse kinematic (IK) motion
* Applying filters, blend modes, and masks
* Integrating audio and video
* Using ActionScript code snippets
* Configuring SWF and HTML publish settings
* Publishing with AIR

$30

Content:

Adobe Flash Professional 1m 20s
What is Flash? 1m 20s
Introduction 5m 0s
Welcome 1m 5s
Using the exercise files 44s
Setting up local file permissions 3m 11s
1. How Flash Professional Fits In 13m 33s
Flash for desktop web browsers 5m 14s
Flash for desktop apps 2m 50s
Flash for mobile apps 3m 7s
Understanding how ActionScript fits into Flash 2m 22s
2. Introduction to the Flash Interface 27m 10s
Choosing the type of document to work with 7m 44s
Getting to know the Flash interface 3m 27s
Working with panels and workspaces 9m 0s
Understanding document orientation and guides 3m 20s
Zooming and moving around 3m 39s
3. Importing Graphics 24m 2s
Navigating in the library 5m 35s
Understanding and importing bitmaps 5m 5s
Understanding and importing vector files 6m 34s
Using tricks and techniques for imported imagery 6m 48s
4. Structuring a Flash Document 44m 43s
Adjusting document settings 7m 23s
Organizing layers 9m 7s
Utilizing guide layers 4m 33s
Understand the Timeline and frame rate 4m 2s
Previewing a project 3m 5s
Defining frames and keyframes 9m 58s
Manipulating frames and keyframes 6m 35s
5. Drawing Basic Shapes 29m 15s
Understanding the Merge and Object Drawing modes 9m 13s
Using the Line and Pencil tools 5m 47s
Drawing with the Rectangle and Oval tools 5m 37s
Drawing with the Rectangle and Oval Primitive tools 2m 53s
Creating shapes with the PolyStar tool 2m 39s
Manipulating items with the Free Transform tool 3m 6s
6. Beyond Basic Shapes 51m 29s
Painting with the Deco and Spray Brush tools 5m 39s
Using the Paint Bucket and Ink Bottle tools 4m 24s
Cleaning up with the Eraser tool 4m 4s
Drawing with the Brush tool 4m 13s
Sampling color with the eyedropper 2m 4s
Using the Color and Swatches panels 8m 51s
Working with gradients and the Gradient Transform tool 6m 22s
Using the Lock Fill modifier with gradients 5m 12s
Creating shapes with the Pen tool and working with anchor points 4m 57s
Selecting with the Lasso tool 5m 43s
7. Symbols 36m 55s
Introducing symbols 9m 41s
Understanding movie clip symbols 3m 26s
Using graphic symbols 3m 6s
Exploring button symbols 8m 20s
Applying 3D and color transformations to symbols 7m 27s
Troubleshooting problematic selections and seeing their properties 4m 55s
8. Motion Tweens 15m 3s
Creating motion tweens 8m 0s
Modifying motion tweens 3m 51s
Using motion tweens in 3D space 3m 12s
9. Motion Tweening Tools and Techniques 40m 36s
Exploring cool tools for motion tweening 7m 40s
Exploring motion presets 2m 11s
Copying and reversing motion tweens 4m 53s
Nesting timelines 5m 1s
Using graphics vs. movie clips for animation 8m 36s
Onion skinning 2m 55s
Editing multiple frames 4m 55s
Understanding classic tweens 4m 25s
10. Motion Tweens 8m 32s
Building shape tweens 4m 40s
Employing shape hints 3m 52s
11. Motion Tweening Tools and Techniques 22m 1s
Defining inverse kinematics (IK) motion 59s
Using the Bone tool 8m 17s
Fine-tuning IK motion 4m 12s
Integrating IK Ease, Spring, and Damping features 6m 9s
Creating runtime IK 1m 6s
Converting IK to frame-by-frame animation 1m 18s
12. Effects and Masks 20m 56s
Understanding blend modes 6m 3s
Applying filters 5m 29s
Setting up masks 4m 27s
Animating a mask 4m 57s
13. Text 23m 10s
Comparing Text Layout Framework (TLF) vs. Classic text 7m 15s
Exploring types of TLF and Classic text 5m 38s
Exploring TLF text features 3m 31s
Embedding fonts 5m 51s
Working with right-to-left fonts 55s
14. Video 11m 24s
Using the Adobe Media Encoder 3m 24s
Integrating video 8m 0s
15. Audio 19m 30s
Importing and using audio 7m 7s
Affecting playback control 4m 6s
Controlling volume 4m 53s
Choosing audio compression settings 3m 24s
16. ActionScript 28m 55s
Understanding ActionScript and the Actions panel 9m 33s
Using code snippets to create clickable items 6m 59s
Combining clickability and timeline control 6m 1s
Troubleshooting ActionScript 6m 22s
17. Integrating with Other Applications 9m 26s
Integrating with Photoshop 4m 45s
Integrating with Illustrator 4m 41s
18. Publishing 33m 5s
Cleaning up and optimizing a file 7m 1s
Configuring SWF publish settings 8m 6s
Configuring HTML publish settings 8m 18s
Looking at other types of files you can publish 4m 5s
Using the Bandwidth Profiler 5m 35s
19. Creating Desktop and Mobile Applications 14m 22s
Understanding Adobe AIR 2m 43s
Publishing to desktop with AIR 5m 21s
Publishing for mobile with AIR 6m 18s
Conclusion 2m 32s
Where to go from here 2m 32s

Whether you’re new to Flash Professional or an old hand who needs a refresher and a guide to the new features in CS6, this course from software engineer and educator Joseph Labrecque will teach you what you need to know. After covering the application’s interface and tools, Joseph delves into both longstanding features like the Flash Library and ActionScript and new features like the mobile simulator, sprite sheets, and PNG sequences. You’ll also learn how to use sound, video, and animation in your projects. This Learn by Video course is presented in partnership with our friends at Peachpit Press.

$30

Content:

Introducing Flash Professional CS6
What Is Adobe Flash Professional?
08:43
What's the Course About?
01:54
What's New in Flash Professional CS6
02:42
Flash Professional Application Overview
Application Interface Overview
08:50
Welcome Screen
05:22
Flash Professional File Formats
06:54
Accessing Help
05:27
Getting Familiar with Flash Professional
The Application Menu
09:41
The Toolbar
15:13
The Stage
05:13
The Timeline
05:59
Working with Panels
04:55
The Properties Inspector
06:59
Colors and Swatches
06:11
Managing Workspaces
03:09
Exploring Basic Tools
The Selection, Subselection, and Lasso Tools
05:44
The Line and Shape Tools
06:39
The Pencil, Brush, and Eraser Tools
09:14
The Paint Bucket and Ink Bottle Tools
03:06
The Eyedropper Tool
03:09
The Hand and Zoom Tools
03:27
Exploring Advanced Tools
The Text Tool
10:28
The Pen and Anchor Point Tools
04:50
The Free Transform and Gradient Tools
03:58
The 3D Rotation and Translation Tools
04:02
The Bone and Bind Tools
07:51
Project Explorations
Setting the Stage
04:28
Drawing the Assets
06:34
Making It Move
10:39
Adding Interactivity
06:51
Working in Flash Professional
Creating a New Document
04:32
Using Flash Templates
07:44
Working with Guides and Rulers
07:18
Testing a Project
06:58
Creating a Project Plan
03:56
Working with Assets
Vector vs. Bitmap
04:38
Lines and Fills
04:01
Merge Mode vs. Object Drawing Mode
03:55
Modifying Shapes
08:14
Grouping Assets
06:16
Importing Assets
08:04
Using Trace Bitmap
04:59
Using Break Apart
05:18
Symbols and the Library
The Flash Library
06:33
Graphic Symbols
05:36
Button Symbols
07:44
Movie Clip Symbols
08:02
Sprite Symbols
03:22
Using Filter Effects
05:45
Using Blend Modes
03:49
Working with Text
Creating Text Fields
05:22
Text Field Properties
06:40
Spell-Checking Text
04:13
Applying Filter Effects to Text
05:47
Embedding Fonts
06:53
Text Layout Framework
08:28
Animating in Flash Professional
Frames and Labels
06:52
Layers and Folders
04:08
Scenes
05:05
Frame-by-Frame Animation
04:36
Onion Skinning
04:12
Shape Tweens
05:02
Classic Tweens
05:59
Motion Tweens
06:04
Advanced Animation Techniques
Nesting Animations
06:48
Using the Motion Editor
06:34
Classic Motion Guides
05:40
Motion Presets
07:13
Shape Hints
06:10
Masking
06:00
Inverse Kinematics
07:59
Using Sound and Video
Importing Sound Files
07:31
Using Sound Within Symbols
05:40
Adobe Media Encoder
07:13
Importing Video Files
04:10
ActionScript Basics
The Actions Panel
07:24
Timeline-Based ActionScript
06:16
Code Snippets
05:12
ActionScript Classes
07:50
Controlling Sound with AS3
07:19
Controlling Video with AS3
08:52
Authoring for Mobile Devices
Mobile Targets
04:40
Mobile Code Snippets
04:49
Mobile Content Simulator
05:04
Testing on a Device
01:52
Debugging Flash Projects
Trace Statements
07:23
The Flash Professional Debugger
07:10
Debugging on Devices
05:29
Troubleshooting Errors
06:57
Compiling and Publishing
Optimizing Content
06:06
Publishing for the Flash Player
09:09
Publishing for AIR Desktop
05:55
Publishing for AIR Mobile
07:33
Exporting Sprite Sheets
06:13
Generating Image Sequences
02:37
Using the CreateJS Extension
06:14
Ensuring Accessibility
03:39
Closing Thoughts
Closing Thoughts
02:55

 

With the CS6 release, Adobe Illustrator is turning 25 and has a new look and a few new features. In this course, Justin Seeley hosts a tour of the interface changes and the tools introduced in this version. The course covers Pattern Options for creating simple, repeatable patterns for web graphics, advanced tracing options with the Image Tracing tool, and the improved performance and file management features.
Topics include:
* Adjusting the interface brightness
* Understanding updates to panels and preferences
* Creating a repeatable pattern
* Performing a basic trace
* Converting pixels to paths
* Understanding what 64-bit support means for you
* Introducing startup profiles
* Understanding the Save for Web changes
* Enhancing artwork with gradients on strokes
* Working with the improved Gaussian Blur

$30

Content:

Introduction 01m 29s
Welcome 01m 02s
Using the exercise files 00m 27s
1. User Interface 08m 06s
Adjusting the interface brightness 02m 31s
Understanding the Control panel 01m 52s
Exploring the panel system 03m 43s
2. Pattern Creation 13m 09s
Exploring the Pattern Options feature 05m 34s
Creating a simple pattern 03m 37s
Creating a repeatable pattern for the web 03m 58s
3. Image Tracing 12m 44s
Overview of image tracing 01m 58s
Performing a basic trace 01m 42s
Using built-in tracing presets 02m 24s
Exploring advanced tracing options 05m 24s
Converting pixels to paths 01m 16s
4. Performance Changes 04m 20s
Understanding 64-bit support 01m 50s
Improved performance: Gaussian Blur 02m 30s
5. File Management 08m 34s
Using startup profiles 03m 15s
Exploring the Save for Web dialog 03m 12s
Reviewing updates to units of measurement 02m 07s
6. Enhancing Your Artwork 02m 14s
Adding gradients to strokes 02m 14s
Conclusion 00m 25s
Where to go from here 00m 25s

Adobe Illustrator can be used to accomplish many different design tasks, from illustration to app development. This course demonstrates core concepts and techniques that can be applied to any workflow—for print, the web, or building assets that will find their way into other applications. Author Justin Seeley explains the elements that make up vector graphics (paths, strokes, and fills) while showing how to use each of the drawing tools, and demonstrates how to combine and clean up paths and organize them into groups and layers. The course also covers text editing, working with color, effects, and much more.

$30

Content:

Adobe Illustrator 1m 15s
What is Illustrator? 1m 15s
Introduction 2m 17s
Welcome 58s
Using the exercise files 1m 19s
1. Getting Started 41m 25s
Understanding vector graphics 5m 0s
Setting preferences 9m 24s
Touring the interface 9m 41s
Exploring the panels 6m 54s
Working with the Control panel 4m 25s
Creating and saving workspaces 6m 1s
2. Working with Documents 43m 42s
Creating files for print 4m 42s
Creating files for the web 3m 36s
Managing multiple documents 3m 25s
Navigating within a document 5m 21s
Using rulers, guides, and grids 6m 59s
Changing units of measurement 1m 50s
Using preview modes 3m 10s
Creating and using custom views 3m 12s
Locking and hiding artwork 3m 43s
Creating and using artboards 7m 44s
3. Selecting and Transforming Objects 1h 1m
Setting your selection preferences 5m 57s
Using the Direct Selection and Group Selection tools 4m 6s
Using the Magic Wand tool 5m 45s
Using the Lasso tool 4m 9s
Selecting objects by attribute 6m 48s
Grouping objects 3m 7s
Using isolation mode 4m 48s
Resizing your artwork 3m 55s
Rotating objects 2m 10s
Distorting and transforming objects 6m 26s
Repeating transformations 5m 6s
Reflecting and skewing objects 4m 54s
Aligning and distributing objects 4m 38s
4. Working with Color 29m 27s
RGB vs. CMYK 1m 46s
Adjusting Illustrator color settings 5m 10s
Process vs. global swatches 5m 6s
Creating spot colors 3m 40s
Using the swatch groups 2m 33s
Working with color libraries 3m 17s
Importing swatches 4m 4s
Using the Color Guide panel 3m 51s
5. Working with Fills and Strokes 57m 36s
Understanding fills and strokes 4m 18s
Working with fills 4m 58s
Working with strokes 8m 46s
Creating dashes and arrows 8m 1s
Creating variable-width strokes 4m 3s
Using width profiles 3m 31s
Outlining strokes 3m 51s
Creating and editing gradients 5m 45s
Applying gradients to strokes 3m 8s
Applying and editing pattern fills 4m 52s
Creating your own pattern fill 6m 23s
6. Working with Paths 20m 20s
Understanding paths 2m 41s
Understanding anchor points 4m 20s
Working with open and closed paths 5m 28s
Joining and averaging paths 4m 9s
Using the Scissors tool and the Knife tool 3m 42s
7. Creating Shapes 37m 56s
Understanding drawing modes 4m 23s
Creating compound paths 5m 15s
Creating compound shapes 4m 11s
Working with the Shape Builder tool 6m 32s
Working with the Blob Brush and Eraser tools 5m 26s
Working with the Paintbrush and Pencil tools 7m 8s
Smoothing and erasing paths 5m 1s
8. Don't Be Afraid of the Pen Tool 35m 53s
Exploring the Pen tool 2m 39s
Drawing straight lines 5m 12s
Drawing simple curves 5m 23s
Understanding the many faces of the Pen tool 6m 10s
Converting corners and curves 1m 46s
Your keyboard is your friend 2m 14s
Tracing artwork with the Pen tool 12m 29s
9. Using Type in Illustrator 35m 33s
Adjusting your type settings 4m 10s
Creating point and area text 3m 36s
Basic text editing 2m 14s
Creating threaded text 4m 59s
Using the type panels 9m 48s
Creating text on a path 5m 11s
Converting text into paths 1m 43s
Saving time with keyboard shortcuts 3m 52s
10. Adjusting Appearance 27m 25s
Exploring the Appearance panel 4m 44s
Explaining attribute stacking order 1m 40s
Applying multiple fills 3m 1s
Applying multiple strokes 4m 20s
Adjusting appearance with live effects 4m 46s
Saving appearances as graphic styles 8m 54s
11. Working with Layers 20m 44s
Exploring the Layers panel 4m 18s
Creating and editing layers 3m 27s
Targeting objects in the Layers panel 3m 3s
Working with sublayers 3m 0s
Hiding, locking, and deleting layers 4m 14s
Using the Layers panel menu 2m 42s
12. Working with Images 46m 0s
Placing images into Illustrator 2m 53s
Working with the Links panel 6m 5s
Embedding images into Illustrator 3m 12s
Cropping images with a mask 5m 8s
Exploring the Image Trace panel 12m 14s
Tracing photographs 8m 6s
Tracing line art 4m 33s
Converting pixels to paths 3m 49s
13. Creating and Using Symbols 19m 21s
What are symbols? 2m 45s
Using prebuilt symbols 3m 3s
Using the Symbol Sprayer tool 4m 19s
Creating new symbols 3m 50s
Breaking the symbol link 3m 19s
Redefining symbols 2m 5s
14. Drawing in Perspective 12m 9s
Defining a perspective grid 4m 29s
Drawing artwork in perspective 3m 49s
Applying artwork to the grid 3m 51s
15. Printing, Saving, and Exporting 35m 7s
Printing your artwork 6m 16s
Saving your artwork 2m 2s
Saving in legacy formats 3m 0s
Saving templates 4m 18s
Creating PDF files 5m 23s
Saving for the web 4m 46s
Creating high-res bitmap images 3m 58s
Using Illustrator files in Photoshop and InDesign 5m 24s
Conclusion 56s
Next steps 56s

This course is the first in a four-part series by industry-pro Deke McClelland on creating elegant, optimized graphics with the tools in Adobe Illustrator CS6 and Deke's special, branded techniques.
This installment covers subjects such as working with shapes and closed paths, including painting, grouping, and coloring, and placing and adjusting type. Deke shows you how to select fonts, create hanging indents, and tweak the kerning and leading of your text. Additional chapters cover drawing and editing paths (and their points) and moving and transforming objects in your artwork.
Topics include:
* Rotating and duplicating objects
* Grouping and stacking
* Erasing and painting selected paths
* Using the Shape Builder tool
* Reflecting across an angled axis
* Simulating beveled edges
* Creating a network of interlocking paths
* Placing and flowing text
* Creating page margins
* Adjusting type size
* Creating and applying paragraph styles
* Using the Glyphs panel
* Inserting and removing anchor points

$30

Content:

Introduction 2m 16s
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 16s
1. Making a Document 29m 56s
Opening Illustrator from the Windows desktop 2m 40s
Opening Illustrator from the Macintosh Finder 5m 27s
Creating a new document 4m 50s
Exploring advanced document controls 4m 43s
Modifying your document 3m 6s
Saving changes 6m 4s
Closing all open documents 3m 6s
2. Working with Artboards 29m 35s
Pages of any size, at any angle 57s
Moving and modifying artboards 4m 33s
Changing the size and shape of artboards 3m 54s
Creating and copying artboards 5m 2s
Introducing the Artboard panel 7m 10s
Auto-arranging artboards 3m 24s
Working with artboards and rulers 4m 35s
3. Getting Around 31m 19s
Navigating through your artwork 36s
Using the dark vs. the light interface 3m 29s
Zooming a document and its artboards 4m 9s
Honing in on specific details 3m 3s
Scrolling or panning a document 2m 15s
Using the Page Up and Page Down keys 1m 57s
Navigating numerically and from a panel 3m 6s
Working with multiple open documents 3m 55s
Exploring panels and workspaces 5m 17s
Cycling through screen modes 3m 25s
4. Making Line Art 46m 1s
Now, we draw 39s
Meet the line tools 2m 8s
Creating custom guides 4m 13s
Drawing a heart with the Arc tool 4m 6s
Adjusting control handles 4m 35s
Reflecting and completing a shape 3m 13s
Drawing a target with the Polar Grid tool 4m 44s
Pasting one shape inside another 3m 57s
Drawing an arrow with the Line tool 6m 18s
Rotating, filling, and stacking 3m 37s
Using the Spiral tool 3m 29s
Tracing existing spirals 5m 2s
5. Drawing Geometric Shapes 1h 15m
And now, we draw better 53s
Meet the shape tools 2m 8s
Using the Ellipse tool 6m 33s
Creating compound paths 7m 5s
Drawing a multi-point star 7m 28s
Adding and aligning a center point 6m 58s
Drawing rounded rectangles 7m 35s
Aligning to a "split location" 5m 27s
Reflecting across an axis 5m 29s
Modifying the constraint axes 6m 34s
Turning a triangle into an arrowhead 8m 28s
Using the Flare tool 6m 25s
Using the top-secret tilde key trick 4m 11s
6. Tracing an Image 46m 24s
Auto-tracing in Illustrator 47s
Opening an image to embed it 3m 49s
Placing an image to create a dynamic link 3m 45s
Looking at auto-tracing and resolution 5m 48s
Adjusting layer previews 3m 3s
Cleaning up with the Threshold option 6m 43s
Cleaning up with the Noise option 3m 34s
Expanding and simplifying traced paths 7m 51s
Flipping and fusing shapes 5m 54s
Scaling resolution-independent vectors 5m 10s
7. Scaling and Rotating 41m 5s
Exploring the realm of transformations 1m 24s
Creating a tracing template 4m 50s
Drawing a diamond with the Polygon tool 3m 51s
Dragging and duplicating 2m 55s
Using the Scale tool 6m 50s
Scaling along a constraint axis 6m 11s
Using the Rotate tool 5m 6s
Rotating and duplicating 5m 52s
Grouping, stacking, and organizing 4m 6s
8. Painting Freeform Shapes 1h 28m
Understanding the best tools for painting 1m 12s
Painting closed path outlines 5m 49s
Erasing and painting selected paths 7m 8s
Reassigning keyboard shortcuts 4m 24s
Painting in the Outline mode 6m 5s
Using the Shape Builder tool 6m 16s
Subtracting with the Shape Builder 7m 7s
Assigning colors with the Shape Builder 7m 29s
Reflecting across an angled axis 6m 22s
Cleaning up Shape Builder leftovers 8m 34s
Working in the Group Isolation mode 9m 29s
Establishing hierarchy with groups 4m 44s
Simulating beveled edges 7m 34s
Creating a network of interlocking paths 6m 24s
9. Working with Type 1h 16m
Text formatting at its best 47s
Creating page margins 6m 1s
Placing and flowing text 5m 39s
Selecting words and lines of type 5m 46s
Working with point text 4m 53s
Previewing and assigning fonts 6m 4s
Adjusting type size incrementally 4m 8s
Adjusting leading and assigning paragraph indents 5m 2s
Pair kerning and tracking 8m 9s
Exploring hanging indents and paragraph spacing 4m 54s
Creating and applying paragraph styles 5m 11s
Redefining paragraph styles 6m 16s
Using the Glyphs panel 8m 37s
Spell-checking your text 4m 41s
10. Using the Pen Tool 1h 32m
The tool that can drawing anything 1m 26s
Drawing straight-sided paths 5m 5s
Editing a path as you draw it 5m 33s
Inserting and removing anchor points 5m 8s
Faking simple spline curves 6m 49s
Adding curvature with Round Corners 7m 23s
Introducing control handles 6m 5s
Drawing perfectly smooth outlines 8m 41s
Tracing a freeform, curving path 8m 18s
Exploring three ways to make a cusp point 8m 40s
Converting an existing anchor point 5m 24s
Drawing inside or behind other paths 8m 2s
Copying and repurposing segments 8m 14s
Copying and transforming entire layers 7m 35s
Conclusion 46s
See ya 46s

Join author and industry expert Deke McClelland as he teaches you how to take advantage of the next level of dynamic features in Adobe Illustrator CS6. This installment of his Illustrator CS6 One-on-One series starts by showing you how to effectively manage layers, clipping groups, and swatches, so that you can easily swap out colors and content. Deke then explains how to create customized strokes and patterns and build complex gradients with transparency and dynamic effects, and then apply these features to paths, groups, and editable text to create professional-quality artwork. He also highlights some of the most popular features in Illustrator: Live Paint and all ten of its Pathfinder operations. The final chapters show how to prepare your projects for print and save them for distribution on the web.
Topics include:

  • Creating layers, sublayers, and groups
  • Lifting a color and creating a swatch
  • Assigning colors to paths inside groups
  • Adjusting the stacking order
  • Using the Width tool to adjust line weight
  • Masking a pattern inside a background
  • Assigning and modifying a gradient fill
  • Creating a radial gradient
  • Drawing a linear spiral with the Polar Grid tool
  • Adding a credible 3D cast shadow
  • Contouring with the Blob Brush and Eraser
  • Creating and painting an overlapping path
  • Placing Photoshop images in Illustrator files
  • Previewing and printing documents
  • Optimizing documents for the web

$30

Content:

11. Layers and Groups40m 44s
Welcome to One-on-One 1m 52s
Creating and moving objects onto layers 5m 5s
Creating and using sublayers 5m 48s
Creating 3D type as a group 3m 4s
Selecting and working inside groups 6m 45s
Creating clipping groups 6m 40s
Working in an isolation mode 5m 29s
Applying effects to groups and layers 6m 1s
12. Swatches and Stacking Order1h 8m
How swatches and stacking work 1m 19s
Multiple views and power duplication 9m 6s
Lifting a color and creating a swatch 6m 52s
Creating and using global swatches 5m 2s
Deleting, adding, and managing swatches 5m 20s
Assigning and eyedropping colors 5m 12s
Assigning colors to paths inside groups 5m 11s
Adjusting the stacking order 6m 30s
Selecting down a stack of paths 3m 35s
Pasting in front and in back 6m 13s
Combining multiple fills 7m 32s
Trapping your art with rich blacks 6m 16s
13. Strokes, Dashes, and Arrows1h 8m
The rich world of strokes 52s
Introducing the Stroke panel 4m 49s
Caps, joins, and miter limits 5m 36s
Dashes and arrowheads 4m 12s
Using the Width tool to vary the line weight 9m 1s
Adjusting the width of closed path outlines 7m 47s
Making a coupon border with scissors 4m 38s
Combining dashes with round caps 7m 50s
Making an official money-like type effect 7m 59s
Creating a wavy, engraving-line background 5m 39s
Masking a pattern inside a background 5m 0s
Creating tapering rules (with inset strokes) 4m 39s
14. Gradients and the Gradient Tool1h 2m
How gradients work 59s
Assigning and modifying a gradient fill 5m 4s
Using the Gradient tool and annotator 7m 18s
Editing multiple gradients at a time 4m 14s
Establishing symmetrical gradients 5m 48s
Creating a radial gradient 5m 26s
Adjusting the midpoint skew 3m 31s
Mixing gradients with blend modes 4m 34s
Adding transparency to a gradient 7m 9s
Applying and editing dynamic effects 5m 45s
Assigning a gradient to editable text 5m 29s
Editing text that includes dynamic effects 2m 19s
The new gradient stroke options 5m 0s
15. Seamlessly Repeating Patterns44m 28s
The reinvention of tile patterns 50s
Drawing a linear spiral with the Polar Grid tool 5m 44s
Assembling the raw ingredients for a pattern 4m 53s
Using the new Pattern Generator 6m 51s
The new tile types: Brick and Hex 4m 11s
The Size Tile to Art and Overlap options 5m 43s
Creating a new pattern based on an existing one 3m 0s
Applying patterns to strokes and text 6m 15s
Moving and transforming patterns 4m 5s
Fixing problem legacy patterns 2m 56s
16. Align and Distribute41m 34s
How alignment and distribution work 1m 0s
Snapping one anchor point to another 2m 35s
Aligning a group to the artboard 1m 54s
Distributing objects across the artboard 2m 49s
Aligning to a fixed "key" object 4m 0s
Distributing by a specified amount of space 5m 10s
Using the Align options to move objects 5m 49s
Adding an extruded edge effect 5m 45s
Optically aligning objects 3m 2s
Adding a credible 3D cast shadow 9m 30s
17. Pathfinder Operations1h 12m
Combining simple shapes to make complex ones 1m 22s
Understanding all ten Pathfinder options 8m 27s
Unite closed paths, join open ones 3m 25s
Creating a dynamic compound shape 4m 40s
Adding to a compound shape 3m 20s
Variable width, Outline Stroke, and Unite 5m 18s
Painting rough leaves with the Blob Brush 4m 56s
Creating credible leaves with dynamic effects 4m 15s
Contouring with the Blob Brush and Eraser 9m 14s
Filling in branches with the Blob Brush 6m 7s
Merging layers and uniting paths 9m 5s
Using Divide and Minus Back 4m 28s
Nesting one compound shape inside another 7m 25s
18. Live Paint and Interlocking Paths1h 17m
Filling and stroking overlapping areas 52s
Introducing Live Paint 5m 39s
Stroking with the Live Paint Bucket 5m 36s
Using the Live Paint Selection tool 4m 52s
Adding paths to a Live Paint object 8m 36s
Building a classic, interwoven Celtic knot 6m 21s
Weaving one path outline into another 5m 34s
Creating a path that overlaps itself 7m 6s
Painting a path that overlaps itself 5m 47s
Combining gradients and depth with Live Paint 7m 2s
Swapping out Live Paint fills and strokes 8m 2s
Casting shadows inside a Live Paint object 12m 29s
19. Placing Photoshop Images1h 2m
Illustrator and the photographic image 1m 3s
Placing a photograph into your artwork 3m 5s
Dragging and dropping photos into Illustrator 3m 59s
Working with linked images 8m 19s
Scaling and cropping inside a bounding box 5m 8s
Cropping an image inside a clipping mask 5m 52s
Adding a border to an image, and colorizing 5m 12s
Creating a trendy gradient page curl 5m 45s
Placing a Photoshop image, with transparency 7m 13s
Linking vs. embedding images 10m 29s
Unembed and Package (Creative Cloud only) 6m 43s
20. Printing a Document1h 19m
Local and commercial printing 1m 1s
Convert all text to path outlines 7m 17s
Setting the trim size and bleed 6m 50s
Creating automatic and custom crop marks 9m 13s
Introducing and applying Pantone spot colors 8m 7s
Using the Separations Preview panel 4m 43s
Troubleshoot, overprint, and trapping 9m 33s
Printing: The General options 5m 35s
Placement, scale, and tiling 5m 59s
Adding trim and printer's marks 7m 35s
PostScript and color separations 8m 20s
The esoteric advanced printing options 5m 25s
21. Saving for the Web (and PowerPoint)49m 51s
Making art for the Internet 58s
Aligning your artwork to the pixel grid 6m 55s
Optimizing editable text for the web 7m 1s
Increasing the resolution of your web art 3m 30s
Saving a continuous-tone JPEG image 7m 16s
Optimizing your art to a specific file size 5m 19s
Saving high-contrast, low-color art to GIF 8m 17s
The more flexible PNG format 5m 6s
Saving PNG-24 for the web or PowerPoint 5m 29s
Conclusion55s
Until next time 55s

This course is the third in a four-part series devoted to mastering the premiere graphics creation application, Adobe Illustrator, version CS6. Industry pro Deke McClelland takes a project-based learning approach to the key features in Illustrator, including Recolor Artwork, transparency, masks, blend modes, strokes and fills, and dynamic effects. The course also covers techniques for creating custom gradients, designing logos, generating photorealistic neon text, and wrapping type around objects. Plus, Deke shows how to call up the most essential features by organizing your workspace and employing time-saving keyboard shortcuts, how to manage the color settings, and how to adjust a few settings to make the program work even better.
Topics include:

  • Installing dekeKeys, Deke's free custom keyboard shortcuts
  • Understanding the color-managed workflow
  • Creating a multicolor blend
  • Establishing a clipping mask
  • Blending different levels of opacity
  • Combining a letterform with a path outline
  • Warping logo type around a circle
  • Adding neon blur and bokeh in Photoshop
  • Mixing and matching color harmonies
  • Recoloring artwork
  • Working with the Calligraphic, Scatter, and Art Brushes
  • Creating translucency
  • Editing attributes in the Appearance panel
  • Adjusting and updating dynamic effects

$30

Content:

22. Shortcuts and Settings 43m 9s
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 9s
Introducing my custom keyboard shortcuts 6m 52s
Installing my dekeKeys shortcuts on Windows 4m 46s
Installing my dekeKeys shortcuts on the Mac 4m 18s
Remapping your Macintosh OS shortcuts 3m 10s
Adjusting a few key Preferences settings 8m 13s
Understanding the color-managed workflow 6m 51s
Establishing the optimal Color Settings 6m 50s
23. Blends and Masks1h 11m
Illustrator's oldest dynamic functions 1m 28s
Creating a multicolor blend 7m 12s
Establishing a clipping mask 5m 40s
Reinstating the colors of a clipping path 8m 1s
Editing individual blended paths 4m 44s
Adjusting the number of steps in a blend 7m 15s
Fixing problems with the Blend tool 4m 2s
Blending different levels of opacity 4m 45s
Editing the spine of a blend 5m 3s
Adding a custom spine to any blend 5m 5s
Advanced blending and masking techniques 6m 18s
Blending between entire groups 3m 2s
Adjusting the speed of a blend 3m 21s
Rotating objects in 3D space (Photoshop Extended only) 5m 36s
24. Logos and Specialty Text1h 0m
Illustrator's logo-making features 1m 8s
Customizing a single character of type 5m 25s
Combining a letterform with a path outline 7m 48s
Creating logo type along an open path 5m 3s
Creating logo type around a closed circle 3m 57s
Vertical alignment, orientation, and spacing 4m 55s
Warping logo type around a circle 6m 56s
Creating a classic neon type effect 5m 39s
Adding random neon brightness fluctuations 5m 19s
Creating neon "block outs" between letters 7m 44s
Adding neon blur and bokeh in Photoshop 6m 16s
25. The Color Guide Panel46m 19s
Generating colors using harmony rules 1m 31s
Introducing the Color Guide panel 5m 16s
The 23 color harmony rules, diagrammed 8m 16s
Mixing and matching color harmonies 5m 59s
Color groups and custom harmony rules 6m 18s
Working in the Edit Colors dialog box 7m 4s
Expanding on an existing harmony rule 6m 51s
Constraining colors to a predefined library 5m 4s
26. Recoloring Artwork32m 44s
Changing lots of colors all at once 1m 2s
Introducing the Recolor Artwork command 4m 58s
Recoloring with the help of swatch groups 4m 35s
Changing the color-assignment order 6m 44s
Reducing the number of colors in your art 5m 7s
Applying tints and shades of a single swatch 5m 37s
Recoloring artwork that contains gradients 4m 41s
27. Calligraphic, Scatter, and Art Brushes1h 15m
Painting with path outlines 1m 24s
Introducing the Brushes panel 4m 25s
Applying and editing a calligraphic brush 7m 34s
Applying and scaling an art brush 6m 12s
Applying and editing a scatter brush 5m 31s
Formatting and scaling brushed text 5m 45s
Designing a custom art brush 7m 35s
Creating (or replacing) an art brush 6m 42s
Refining a brush to fit ends and corners 4m 11s
Expanding, filling, and stroking a brush 7m 4s
Type on a path vs. text as an art brush 7m 3s
Distorting text with the Width tool 8m 49s
Infusing your artwork with a tile pattern 3m 13s
28. Transparency and Blend Modes58m 24s
The many forms of transparency 1m 38s
Creating translucency with the Opacity value 4m 21s
Darken, Multiply, and Color Burn 6m 15s
Lighten, Screen, and Color Dodge 5m 8s
Overlay, Soft Light, Hard Light, Difference, and Exclusion 4m 59s
Hue, Saturation, Color, and Luminosity 5m 12s
Combining the effects of multiple blend modes 6m 42s
Isolating blending and Knockout Group 7m 37s
Combining blend modes with dynamic effects 7m 25s
Exporting transparency from Illustrator 9m 7s
29. The Appearance Panel1h 39m
The Layers panel for dynamic attributes 1m 4s
Applying attributes in the Appearance panel 6m 15s
Creating depth using translucent strokes 5m 37s
Adding, layering, and offsetting strokes 6m 12s
Duplicating entire groups of attributes 7m 55s
Turning stacked strokes into editable paths 5m 43s
Simplifying a multi-stroke effect 6m 31s
Applying the Convert to Shape effect 7m 47s
Adding aligned patterns and shadows 8m 16s
Drawing with arrowheads and angled strokes 8m 49s
Employing overlapping gradient strokes 8m 25s
Drawing circular stroke elements 10m 13s
Outlining an entire multi-stroke effect 8m 39s
Creating seamless wood grain in Photoshop 8m 11s
30. Dynamic Effects1h 12m
The best features in Illustrator 1m 38s
Repeating a series of transformations 6m 18s
Adjusting and updating a dynamic effect 6m 37s
Applying a stroke to an entire layer 6m 24s
Improving the performance of drop shadows 5m 40s
Applying a single effect multiple times 6m 10s
Creating an intricate Spirograph pattern 7m 10s
Adding scalloped edges with Pucker & Bloat 4m 40s
Applying a dynamic Pathfinder to a layer 3m 56s
Creating beveled ornaments 6m 50s
Creating a sculptural type effect 5m 59s
Subtracting editable text from a path 7m 6s
Editing text inside a dynamic effect 4m 25s
31. Graphic Styles27m 40s
Never remember anything again, ever 1m 41s
The pixel-based Effect Gallery 3m 53s
Copying effects from one layer to another 4m 44s
Introducing the Graphic Styles panel 4m 11s
Correcting previews in the Effect Gallery 4m 36s
Adjusting the resolution of your effects 4m 0s
Combining and saving graphic styles 4m 35s
32. Combining the Powers of Illustrator and Photoshop1h 13m
Two powerful graphics programs combine forces 1m 5s
Creating a perfectly centered star shape 6m 52s
Precisely scaling concentric circles 7m 47s
Adding reflective highlights with the Flare tool 6m 23s
Two ways to rasterize vector art for Photoshop 7m 37s
Importing vector art as a Smart Object 6m 47s
Creating a lens flare effect in Photoshop 7m 56s
Photographic texture and brushed highlights 6m 26s
Modifying a vector Smart Object in Illustrator 6m 33s
Converting Illustrator paths to shape layers 6m 27s
Assign layer effects to native shape layers 5m 55s
Completing a work of photorealistic art 3m 46s
Conclusion1m 5s
Until next time 1m 5s

The fourth in a series by industry-pro Deke McClelland on the premiere graphics creation application, Adobe Illustrator, this course shows you how to become a more efficient, exact, and creative designer with the advanced tools in Illustrator. Maximize your productivity with tools such as Smart Guides to precisely align your artwork, symbols that help you reuse it, and pattern brushes that allow you to tile it across the screen. Plus, learn how to add special creative touches to designs with the Gradient Mesh feature, great for creating photorealistic airbrushing effects; the Liquify and Envelope tools; the layered transparency you can achieve with opacity masks; and 3D effects like live, editable 3D type.

Topics include:
- Setting up angular construction guides
- Kerning and clipping hand-drawn type
- Creating and naming symbols
- Using symbols to simulate master pages
- Creating a gradient mesh
- Using gradients to cast shadows
- Fading artwork with a gradient opacity mask
- Warping and distorting artwork with Liquify and Envelope
- Assembling a seamless pattern brush
- Creating charts and pictographs
- Working in 3D space

$30

Content:

33. Using Smart Guides 45m 41s
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 6s
Setting up angular construction guides 4m 59s
Shaving off miter joins and projecting caps 4m 53s
Precisely aligning angled logo artwork 5m 52s
Covering up gaps and seams in your logo 7m 9s
Creating ornaments based on miter joins 5m 9s
Hand-drawing letters as stroked paths 9m 34s
Kerning and clipping hand-drawn type 5m 59s
34. Working with Symbols 49m 32s
The benefits of using symbols 1m 3s
How symbols and instances work 4m 54s
Creating and naming symbols 6m 42s
Introducing 9-slice scaling 4m 31s
Customizing the effects of 9-slice scaling 7m 5s
Acquiring, trading, and previewing symbols 6m 5s
Duplicating and replacing symbol instances 5m 45s
Using symbols to simulate master pages 6m 53s
Advanced symbol modifications 6m 34s
35. Gradient Mesh 1h 12m
Shading objects with Gradient Mesh 51s
Creating a gradient mesh 4m 23s
Adding and deleting lines with the Mesh tool 4m 27s
Assigning colors to mesh points 6m 35s
Finessing colors to add depth and shading 6m 10s
Creating a gradient with the Mesh tool 8m 27s
Wrapping gradients around circles 4m 15s
Working with slender, bending shapes 8m 48s
Creating soft and sharp transitions 6m 17s
Converting a linear gradient to a mesh 7m 44s
Converting a radial gradient to a mesh 9m 16s
Using gradients to cast shadows 5m 10s
36. Opacity Masks 24m 19s
Black conceals, white reveals 1m 4s
Introducing opacity masks 6m 24s
Assigning an empty opacity mask to a layer 4m 45s
Drawing inside an opacity mask 4m 57s
Fading artwork with a gradient opacity mask 3m 3s
Nesting one opacity mask inside another 4m 6s
37. Liquify and Envelope 1h 6m
Two ways to apply free-form distortions 59s
Introducing the Warp tool 7m 50s
Brush size, Detail, and Simplify 8m 20s
Liquifying an isolated portion of a path 9m 48s
The Twirl, Pucker, and Bloat tools 8m 37s
The Scallop, Crystallize, and Wrinkle tools 7m 5s
Simplifying a path; creating a custom starburst 6m 26s
Applying an envelope-style distortion 4m 34s
Editing the contents of an envelope 7m 40s
Masking the contents of an entire layer 5m 0s
38. Pattern Brushes 58m 45s
Up to five tiles per pattern brush 1m 8s
Creating a basic pattern brush 6m 31s
Correcting and adjusting a pattern brush 4m 54s
Designing a matching corner tile 8m 21s
Adding an angled loop to a corner design 4m 16s
Creating end tiles and tile perimeters 6m 27s
Cropping your designs inside your tiles 4m 22s
Assembling a seamless pattern brush 5m 24s
Adding a white buffer zone to a pattern brush 8m 24s
Reconciling very acute corners in a path 8m 58s
39. Charts and Pictographs 42m 33s
The pleasures and pitfalls of graphs 1m 27s
Importing and graphing numerical data 7m 2s
Modifying data to create a category axis 4m 6s
Reformatting text and values in a graph 5m 40s
Changing the Graph Type settings 5m 27s
Creating and applying a graph design 8m 14s
Repairing a broken pictograph 2m 53s
Recreating a graph at the proper size 7m 44s
40. 3D Effects 37m 47s
The five advantages to 3D in Illustrator 1m 41s
Introducing the three kinds of 3D in Illustrator 5m 6s
Working in 3D space: Pitch, yaw, and roll 5m 13s
Lighting and shading a 3D object 4m 13s
Beveling the edges of a 3D extrusion 4m 23s
Creating live, editable 3D type 4m 30s
Adding cast shadows to 3D type 3m 59s
Assigning and editing a 3D Revolve effect 4m 58s
Mapping artwork onto a 3D object 3m 44s
Conclusion 52s
See ya 52s

Whether you’re new to Illustrator or an old hand who needs a refresher and a guide to the new features in CS6, this course from expert trainers Chad Chelius and Angie Taylor will teach you what you need to know. You’ll learn the fundamentals of Adobe’s vector-based drawing and illustration program and be introduced to the features that are new in the CS6 version. You’ll also have the opportunity to learn advanced techniques for working with shapes, transformations, perspective, color, typography, and more. This Learn by Video course is presented in partnership with our friends at Peachpit Press.

$30

Content:

Introducing Illustrator CS6
What Is Adobe Illustrator?
05:58
About This Course
01:50
What's New in Illustrator CS6
Modernization
04:58
Pattern Editing
08:43
Gradient Strokes
04:40
Image Trace
06:35
Gaussian Blur
03:38
Illustrator Fundamentals
Bitmap vs. Vector
04:46
Understanding Paths
06:11
Exploring the Illustrator Interface
Illustrator's Panels
05:33
The Application Bar and Frame
05:31
Working with Artboards
08:14
Using Workspaces
04:47
Navigating and Using Views in Illustrator
Navigating Documents
07:34
Viewing Modes
04:10
Screen Modes
02:51
Working with Multiple Views
08:35
Hiding Artwork
05:18
Working with Documents
Creating Documents, Templates, and Document Profiles
09:43
Using Template Layers
06:03
Working with Grids and Guides
07:05
Rectangular and Polar Grids
01:56
Saving Illustrator Files
05:41
Using Adobe Bridge
10:52
Creating and Working with Shapes
Using the Shape Tools
11:32
Using Line Tools
09:18
Width Tool Basics
07:45
Using the Width Tool on Artwork
10:31
The Pathfinder and Shape Builder Tools
11:42
The Scissors and Knife Tools
05:04
Joining Paths
03:01
Blob Brush Basics
08:32
Blob Brush Sculpture
06:56
Blob Brush with Calligraphic Brushes
04:02
The Eraser Tool
08:01
Converting Text to Outlines
03:43
Reshape Tools
06:38
Creating Compound Paths and Shapes
06:53
Blending Shapes
08:21
Transformations
Transformation Tools
14:30
The Transform Panel
07:01
Aligning and Distributing
10:40
Understanding Objects and Layers
Using the Selection Tools
07:29
Making and Saving Selections
08:56
Understanding Layers and Stacking Order
05:12
Working with Groups and Collections
09:29
Using Isolation Mode
04:35
Drawing
Drawing Paths
Drawing with the Pen Tool
12:54
Working with Fill and Stroke Properties
13:04
Understanding Drawing Modes
06:00
Using the Outline Strokes Function
05:11
Offsetting Paths
07:01
Drawing with Other Tools
Drawing with the Pencil Tool
08:49
Drawing with the Smooth and Path Eraser Tools
03:34
Drawing with the Brush Tools
Applying Brushes
09:45
Drawing with the Paintbrush Tool
06:23
Creating and Editing Art Brushes
10:30
Using the Bristle Brush Tool
05:23
Pattern Brushes and Scatter Brushes
05:36
Perspective Drawing
Perspective Overview
09:14
Drawing in Perspective
04:42
Placing Artwork into Perspective Grid
10:21
Using Symbols
Using Symbols
07:06
Creating Custom Symbols
02:28
The Symbol Tools
07:55
Color
The Color Panel
09:09
Using Spot and Pantone Colors
09:06
Working with Swatches
08:18
Understanding Gradients
08:43
Live Paint
13:04
Recoloring Artwork
09:39
Using the Color Guide Panel
05:49
Typography
Point vs. Area Type
05:46
Threading Text
05:57
Formatting Text
09:47
Using Character and Paragraph Styles
09:58
Putting Type on a Path
06:11
Using Text Wrap
04:22
Warping Text with Envelope Distort
08:52
Working with Images
Importing Bitmaps
04:45
Converting Art to Vector with Image Trace
09:33
Rasterizing Objects
10:31
Using Clipping Masks
04:52
Opacity Masks
06:03
Expanding Appearances
04:16
Working with Effects
Applying Illustrator Live Effects
06:59
The Appearance Panel
06:39
Saving Graphic Styles
07:29
Warp Effects
07:32
Distort and Transform Effects
10:38
3D Effects: Extrude and Bevel
08:58
3D Effects: Revolve
09:43
Expanding Appearances
11:03
Working with Transparency
09:43
Photoshop Effects
06:47
Graphs
Creating a New Graph
08:05
Updating and Modifying a Graph
06:00
Adding a Design to a Graph
06:30
Beyond Illustrator
Saving as PDF
08:13
Saving for the Web
09:04
Outputting Files for Animation
04:22
Project Explorations
Creating Skin Tones Using Blends
03:14
Drawing a Superhero
17:28
Filling Text with Graphics
11:03
Making a Photo into Art
06:17
Closing Thoughts
Closing Thoughts
00:43

In CS6 Adobe Illustrator is more powerful than ever before, and in this course Angie Taylor shows you just how easy it can be to use. You’ll get a tour of the interface, gain an understanding of the workflow, and be introduced to core techniques like working with artboards, understanding layers and objects, and making and moving selections. You’ll also learn how to create images from shapes, apply color, reshape paths, and save and export artwork for the web, print, or animation.

$30

Content:

Getting to Know Illustrator
Setting Up a New Document
03:01
User Interface Tour
07:15
Navigating Within the Workspace
08:57
Working with Artboards
06:32
Understanding Layers and Objects
07:36
Making and Moving Selections
07:05
Creating Images from Shapes
Using the Shape Tools
05:38
Combining Shapes with the Pathfinder
06:42
Grouping Objects
06:20
Transforming Objects
09:03
Isolating Shapes
02:40
Working with Text
11:52
Applying Color
Fills and Strokes
12:10
Gradients
12:22
Coloring Artwork
09:59
Alternative Techniques
Using the Appearance Panel
10:53
Creating Shapes with the Blob Brush and Eraser Tools
08:36
Working with the Pen and Pencil Tools
13:52
Tweaking, Exporting, and Saving Artwork
Reshaping Paths
11:19
Saving and Exporting Artwork
06:46

In this Illustrator tutorial, we will learn how to create an infographic from scratch. We start out by discussing why infographics are appealing and when are good scenarios to use them. We'll then learn a little bit about the researching process and a step-by-step list for the preparations you need to go through when doing your own research on your topic. Then, we dive into Illustrator and spend some time setting up our typography in an appealing and cohesive layout. We also learn how to use some of Illustrator's built-in tools for creating custom charts and graphs and also some of the tools for creating illustrations and icons for the infographic. This tutorial is great for any designer who wants to create an infographic, has a basic understanding of illustrator, and wants to know the best workflow for executing this type of process from start to finish. By the end of this training, you'll have created your very own infographic about coral reefs. You'll also understand some new useful tips about typography, charts, icons, color choices, and many more essential pieces to creating a thought-provoking infographic.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Why use an infographic? Where to start making your own
03. Setting up the document and choosing our colors
04. Creating the title layout
05. Setting up the main headers
06. Building the header for the tone-shift call-out text
07. Setting the type for the secondary headers
08. Setting the fact sections pull-quote style type
09. Building the animal life pull-quote
10. Setting the type for the main call-out
11. Setting the last two call-outs and all the remaining stand alone text blocks
12. Creating pie charts
13. Building a customized scatter graph
14. Creating a column graph with customized shapes
15. Placing images and accompanying text
16. Planning and creating illustrations to use as design element
17. Creating coral illustrations with the blob brush
18. Painting and drawing branching coral with the Paintbrush and Pencil tools
19. Creating cohesive icon illustrations
20. Placing the illustrations
21. Placing the icons and their labels
22. Exporting as a PDF with crop marks

After building a logo for a new client or even refreshing the logo for an old one, it’s a great possibility that the next thing your client will ask for are new business cards, envelops and letterhead utilizing their new logo. In this Illustrator tutorial, we will build these three items for a client from scratch. We’ll start off by learning how to setup our document but quickly move through designing a two-sided business card. Next we will layout a sheet of letterhead that can be fed through a desktop printer. Lastly we will lay out a #10 envelope according to US Postal Service standards before learning how to send our files off to be printed on a commercial printing press. As we go through this process, we will learn about setting up grids, working with spot and process colors as well as setting type inside of illustrator along with many other topics. By the end of this training, you will have a great idea of how to build these three highly requested pieces of collateral material for your clients.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Setting up a document to design in
03. Setting up colors for our stationery package
04. Designing the back of the business card
05. Designing the front of the business card
06. Designing the letterhead
07. Designing the envelope
08. Preparing and exporting files for printing

For a graphic designer, there is a distinct difference between vector and raster images or artwork. To avoid sticky situations with printers and clients, its extremely important to know how and where each can or should be used. Illustrator has been able to convert raster images into vectors for several versions now but with Illustrator CS6, this tool set has been overhauled and is a pure joy to use. In this course we will begin by exploring the new Image Trace features in detail. From here we’ll focus on different scenarios where we might need to utilize Image Trace and how we can be more effective in doing so. From photographs to logos and even for sketches and illustrations, Image Trace inside of Illustrator makes short work of converting even the most complex of raster images into vector art. After completing this course, you will know these tools inside and out and will have some great ideas on how to apply them to your own projects.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Implementing and exploring Image Trace
03. Turning a photo into a painting
04. Cleaning up a pencil sketch and converting it to vector
05. Converting text and logos to vector
06. Simplifying a raster image to vectors for spot color printing
07. Saving presets and expanding tracing results

For Graphic Designers, typography is a part of nearly every project we touch. With it playing such a prominent role in our day-to-day work, it should go without saying that being proficient with type is an absolute must. To begin this tutorial, we will learn about choosing appropriate typefaces for our work and how those typefaces communicate to our audience. We will learn about things like the space in and around type as well as some things that we should be aware of when it comes to type that can cause unnecessary eye strain on our viewing audience. To wrap this tutorial up, we will learn about how the typographic needs for a logo were met by simply creating a custom set of letterforms that fit the concept for a logo. After completing this training, not only will you will begin to view the usage of type in your graphic design projects differently but you will begin to ask questions when evaluating your type that will help you to communicate a concept to your audience with more clarity.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Communicating effectively with type
03. Type and grids
04. Type and space
05. Type and eye strain
06. Using type with logos
07. Font exploration and sketching
08. Tracing the lines of the logo and live painting
09. Separation of thick and thin lines
10. Choosing and applying color

$30

Content:

SECTION 1 | INTRO TO ILLUSTRATOR
1.1: Introduction
1.2: Workspace Overview
1.3: Working with Documents
1.4: Creating and Editing Shapes and Lines
SECTION 2 | BEYOND THE BASICS
2.1: Introduction
2.2: Adding Color
2.3: Editing and Transformations
2.4: Align, Order and Pathfinder
2.5: Painting and Drawing
2.6: Using the Pen Tool
2.7: Working with Type
2.8: Using the Layers Panel
SECTION 3 | SPECIAL TECHNIQUES
3.1: Introduction
3.2: Shape Builder, Live Trace, and Live Paint
3.3: Patterns, Gradients, and Blends
3.4: Clipping Paths and Clipping Masks
3.5: Symbols and Graphs
3.6: 3D Rendering
3.7: Advanced Features
3.8: Preparing Files for the Web
SECTION 4 | CREATIVE CLOUD UPDATES
4.1: Introduction
4.2: Cloud and UI Enhancements
4.3: Type Tool
4.4: Font Search
4.5: Swatch color search
4.6: Kuler panel
4.7: CSS Properties Panel & Exporting CS
4.8: SVG Export
4.9: Images in brushes
4.10: Pattern brush corners
4.11: Free Transform
4.12: Text Touchup
4.13: Conclusion

Whether you’re working on a project for an art class or trying to get ahead in the industry, Professor Howard Simpson will show you how the possibilities with Adobe Illustrator are truly endless. Not only can you use the powerful tools in the program to create and draw your own shapes, but also intricate lines, text, and 3-D objects, as well as import graphics and pictures. Professor Simpson has also published many of his own designs and is ready to help you take your creativity to the next level. Bringing his humor and enthusiasm for art, Professor Simpson, will guide you through the complexities of the program and show you how to create various elements on web pages and in print. He has produced work for HBO, worked on various high-end commercial campaigns, and created designs for well-known animation movies. Professor Simpson received his B.A. in Graphic Design from Temple University and has taught Adobe Illustrator to many students throughout his career.

$30

Content:

I. Adobe Illustrator
Workspaces 25:39
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:05
Preferences 0:23
General 0:24
Selection & Anchor Display 2:09
Type & Units 2:54
Guides & Grid 3:08
Smart Guides 3:35
Slices 3:51
Dictionary & Hyphenation 3:58
Plug-ins & Scratch Disks 4:01
User Interface 4:14
File Handling, Clipboard, & Appearance of Black 4:26
Workspaces 5:01
Workspaces Overview 5:02
Creating Your Own Workspace 6:01
Artboards 8:05
Introduction to Artboards 8:06
Example Artboards 9:17
Rulers and Guides 11:24
Show Rulers and Guides 11:25
Hide, Lock, and Clear Guides 12:25
Make Guides: Turning Vector Art Into a Guide 13:31
Grids 14:38
Customizing Your Grids 14:39
Panels 17:44
Main Control Panels 17:45
Side Panel 18:29
Tools Panel: Selection 19:33
Tools Panel: Drawing and Painting 20:40
Tools Panel: Editing 21:15
Tools Panel: Viewing 22:22
Tools Panel: Fill and Stroke 22:45
Tools Panel: Drawing Mode 23:20
Tools Panel: Full Screen Mode 23:44
Lesson Summary 24:19
Objects 20:13
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:09
Rectangle Tool 0:16
Rectangle 0:17
Rounded Rectangle 1:55
Ellipse Tool 4:10
Ellipse Tool 4:11
Polygon Tool 4:58
Introduction to Polygon 4:59
Polygon Menu 5:18
Changing The Sides Of Polygon While Dragging 5:37
Draw Inside Mode 6:10
Star Tool 7:56
Default Star 7:57
Different Star Options 8:16
Flare Tool 10:30
Introduction to The Flare Tool 10:31
Flare Tool Options 11:28
Shape Builder Tool 11:54
Shape Builder Tool 11:55
Line Segment Tool 13:14
Line Segment Tool 13:15
Arc Tool 14:00
Arc Tool 14:01
Spiral Tool 14:38
Spiral Tool 14:39
Polar Grid Tool 15:53
Polar Grid Tool & Options 15:54
Rectangular Grid Tool 17:45
Rectangular Grid Tool Overview 17:46
Rectangular Grid Tool Options 18:10
Practice Assignment 19:20
Layers 16:44
Intro 0:00
Layers Overview 0:10
Layers Panel 1:05
Layers Panel 1:06
Layer Options 3:03
Working With Layers 4:0:4
Isolate Layer 4:05
Create Layer 6:18
Select Layer 7:52
Delete Layer 8:39
Select Objects 9:11
Edit Layers 11:57
Template Layer 13:21
Template Layer 13:22
Practice Assignment 15:14
Appearances, Part 1 24:36
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:06
Targeting Object Attributes 0:31
Targeting Object Attributes: Square Demonstration 0:32
Targeting Object Attributes: Circle Demonstration 1:22
Targeting Object Attributes: Polygon Demonstration 1:45
Adding Multiple Attributes 2:26
Adding Multiple Attributes Overview 2:27
Adding a New Stroke 1 3:33
Adding a New Fill 5:00
Adding a New Stroke 2 6:06
Adding a New Stroke 3 6:44
Live Effects & 3D Extrusions 7:44
3D Extrude & Bevel: Square Demonstration 7:45
3D Extrude & Bevel: Circle Demonstration 10:03
3D Extrude & Bevel: Polygon Demonstration 10:54
3D Revolves 13:24
3D Revolves 13:25
Stylize Effects 16:35
Reduce to Basic Appearance & Clear Appearance 16:36
Stylize: Drop Shadow 18:11
Stylize: Outer Glow 19:42
Stylize: Round Corners 20:18
Opacity 20:49
Fill Opacity 20:50
Stroke Opacity 21:53
Whole Object Opacity 22:37
Practice Assignment 23:30
Appearances, Part 2 23:42
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:05
Scribble Effects 0:16
Scribble Effects Demonstration 1: Apple 0:24
Scribble Effects Demonstration 2: Appearances 2:45
Warp Effects 8:54
Warp Effects Demonstration: Shapes 8:55
Graphic Styles 13:45
Graphic Styles Demonstration 1 13:46
Graphic Styles Demonstration 2 17:38
Selections 26:36
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:09
Selections & Selection Tools 1:25
Basic Selection 1:26
Group Selection 5:00
Direct Selection Tool 11:06
Direct Selection Tool 11:07
Magic Wand 15:08
Magic Wand 15:09
Similar Objects 19:58
Similar Objects 19:59
Save and Edit 21:56
Save Selection 21:57
Edit Selection 23:45
Practice Problem 25:44
Paths 30:48
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:07
Line Segment & Arc Tool 0:42
Line Segment Tool 0:43
Arc Tool 1:46
The Pen Tool & Convert Anchor Point Tool 2:26
Pen Tool & Make Curves 2:27
Convert Anchor Point Tool 5:52
Working With Points 7:46
Add & Remove Points 7:47
Align Points 10:53
Join Points 13:54
Paths 16:12
Smooth Path 16:13
The Scissor Tool & Close Paths 19:44
The Scissor Tool & Open Paths 20:54
Divide & Split Paths 24:15
Simplify Paths 25:28
Color, Part 1 19:27
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:05
Color Modes 0:14
Color Modes: CMYK vs. RGB 0:43
Create Color 3:37
Stroke and Fill Boxes 3:38
Color Picker 4:17
Color Guide 6:01
Swatches 9:18
Global Option 12:36
Color Books 14:22
Color, Part 2 16:43
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:08
Apply Color 0:14
Apply Color 0:15
Custom Color 2:21
Recolor Artwork 2:22
Saving Your Custom Color 7:45
Patterns 9:35
Patterns 9:36
Live Paint Bucket Demo 11:52
Live Paint Bucket Demo 11:53
Practice Problem 15:50
Effects, Part 1 17:38
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:07
Gradients 0:35
Applying Gradient to Shapes 0:36
Applying Gradient to Strokes 7:30
Gradient Mesh Tool 11:33
Create Gradient Mesh 11:34
Adding Colors Demonstration 12:37
Effects, Part 2 22:57
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:06
Blends 0:14
Blending Demonstrations 0:15
Blends & Curve 2:10
Transparency 4:25
Transparency 4:26
Pattern Fills 6:03
Creating a New Pattern 6:22
Applying The New Pattern 9:13
Pathfinder Tool 10:21
Unite 11:21
Minus Front 11:40
Intersect 11:56
Exclude 12:05
Divide 12:19
Trim 12:55
Merge 13:10
Crop 13:23
Outline 14:30
Minus Back 14:41
Offset Paths 15:00
Offset Paths Demonstration 1 15:01
Offset Paths Demonstration 2 16:58
Clipping Mask 18:01
Clipping Mask 18:06
Practice Assignment 21:33
Images 26:07
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:09
Placing Images & Links Panel 0:25
Placing Images 0:26
Links Panel 3:35
Rasterize 7:26
Rasterize 7:27
Clipping Mask 11:05
Clipping Mask 11:06
Image Trace 13:52
Image Trace Part 1 13:53
Image Trace Part 2 22:00
Practice Assignment 23:54
Drawing, Part 1 20:20
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:07
Pencil Tool 0:12
Introduction to The Pencil Tool 0:13
Smooth Tool 1:38
Path Eraser Tool 1:48
Pencil Tool Options 2:22
Blob Brush 3:03
Blob Brush Overview 3:04
Graphic Styles With Blob Brush 5:32
Different Blob Brush Setting 6:56
Connecting Blob Brush With Objects & Shapes 7:57
Calligraphic 9:28
Calligraphic Overview 9:29
Tablet & Pen Setting For Calligraphy 11:10
Creating a New Brush 13:06
Calligraphic Example 17:03
Practice Assignment 18:25
More On Brushes 18:52
Drawing, Part 2 32:39
Intro 0:00
Width Tool 0:19
Width Tool Part 1 0:20
Width Tool Part 2 2:59
Width Point Edit 5:39
Scatter Brush 6:38
Scatter Brush 6:39
Art Brush 11:23
Art Brush Part 1 11:24
Art Brush Part 2 14:36
Pattern Brush 16:56
Pattern Brush Part 1 16:57
Pattern Brush Part 2 18:21
Bristle Brush 22:35
Bristle Brush Overview 22:36
Blending With Bristle Brush 25:39
Changing The Size and Opacity Of Bristle Brush 28:20
Saving Brushes 29:31
Practice Assignment 31:42
Symbols 24:08
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:10
Symbol Sprayer 0:54
Symbol Sprayer Tool 0:55
Symbolism Tools Options 5:05
Break Link To Symbol 7:42
Symbol Shifter Tool 8:33
Symbol Shifter Tool 8:34
Symbol Scruncher Tool 9:44
Symbol Scruncher Tool 9:45
Symbol Sizer Tool 11:03
Symbol Sizer Tool 11:04
Symbol Spinner Tool 13:02
Symbol Spinner Tool 13:03
Symbol Stainer Tool 13:57
Symbol Stainer Tool 13:58
Symbol Screener Tool 16:08
Symbol Screener Tool 16:09
Symbol Styler Tool 17:12
Symbol Styler Tool 17:13
9-Slice 18:59
9-Slice 19:00
Lesson Summary 23:35
Type, Part 1 24:31
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:07
Type Tools 0:20
Type Tools Overview 0:21
Type Tool 0:53
Area Type 2:58
Area Type 2:59
Area Type Options 4:24
Type On a Path 5:32
Type On a Path 5:33
Type On a Circle Part 1 7:43
Type On a Circle Part 2 12:33
Character Set 17:22
Character Set 17:23
Practice Assignment 23:44
Practice Assignment 23:55
Type, Part 2 14:21
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:12
Paragraph Set 0:13
Paragraph Set 0:14
Threads 1:27
Threads 1:28
Styles 2:55
Character Styles 2:56
Paragraph Styles 4:22
Smart Punctuation 7:51
Smart Punctuation 7:52
Wrap Text 8:38
Wrap Text 8:39
OpenType Fonts 10:00
OpenType vs Postscript Font 10:01
Glyphs 11:57
Glyphs 11:58
Practice Assignment 13:00
Perspective 21:46
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:05
Perspective Grid 0:58
Perspective Grid Overview 0:30
Two Points Perspective Grid 2:54
Map Art 6:40
Map Art 6:41
Object and Line 10:45
Object and Line 10:46
Perpendicular 13:48
Perpendicular 13:49
Practice Assignment 20:18
Data 20:58
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:06
Data Variables 0:18
Data Variables 0:19
Data Set 2:16
Introduction To Data Set 2:17
Preset Data Set Example 3:49
Create Graph 5:13
Creating a Graph in Illustrator 5:14
Modifying Graph 7:49
Decorating Your Graph 7:50
Editing Your Data 10:18
Graph Designs 11:31
Graph Designs 11:32
Graphic Bars 15:02
Creating Graphic Bars 15:03
Templates 18:47
Intro 0:00
Lesson Overview 0:04
Templates 0:18
Template Layer 0:19
Templates 3:23
Native Formats 5:32
Native Formats of Illustrator Overview: ai, eps, pdf, fxg, and svg 5:33
EPS 6:43
PDF 7:39
FXG 8:48
SVG 9:07
Export 9:50
Export 9:51
Print & Web 10:52
Print & Web Formats 10:53
Print: TIFF & EPS Overview 11:41
TIFF Options 12:44
Save For Web: PNG 13:59
Save For Web: JPEG 16:54

 

InDesign CS6 is dedicated to improving workflow, document distribution, and flexibility. This course provides in-depth exploration of the new features in InDesign CS6, showing not just where they are and how to use them, but also tips, workarounds, and practical applications of the features. Author Anne-Marie Concepción introduces the Liquid Layout tools and Alternate Layouts for creating flexible layouts for both print and digital publishing; the enhanced tools for creating and updating linked objects within and between documents; the Content Collector and Content Placer tools; and the introduction of EPUB 3. The course also covers creating interactive PDF forms, using the new primary text frame, previewing and exporting color layouts to grayscale, and utilizing the new production aids such as aligning selections to a key object and using smart math in panel fields.
Topics include:
* Working with the Conveyor tool to link objects and map styles
* Applying Liquid Layout rules
* Using flexible columns
* Creating auto-sized text frames
* Accessing recently used fonts
* Fitting frames to more types of text content
* Exporting to EPUB 2 and 3 using new controls
* Inserting HTML and Edge content into a layout
* Creating a PDF form with interactive text, radio, and checkbox fields
* Mapping text styles in linked objects

$30

Content:

Introduction 01m 59s
Welcome 00m 57s
Using the exercise files 01m 02s
1. Quick Start 14m 23s
Exploring interface tweaks 06m 56s
Examining the new tools and dialog boxes 07m 27s
2. Content Conveyer 32m 41s
Working with the Conveyer tool 10m 07s
Linking objects 12m 11s
Mapping styles 10m 23s
3. Flexible Layouts 50m 05s
Understanding flexible layouts 08m 16s
Working with Alternate Layout 12m 52s
Understanding Liquid Layout rules 07m 30s
Using the basic Liquid Page Rule options: Scale, Re-center, and Based on Master 06m 52s
Applying guide-based Liquid Layout rules 08m 10s
Applying object-based Liquid Layout rules 06m 25s
4. New Text Abilities 14m 51s
Working with flexible columns 03m 27s
Auto-sizing text frames 05m 28s
Exploring the Primary Text Frame 05m 56s
5. Text Enhancements 08m 15s
Accessing recently used fonts 02m 09s
Applying Keep settings to spans and tables 02m 45s
Fitting frames to different types of text content 03m 21s
6. EPUB and HTML 28m 27s
Using advanced EPUB 2 export controls 09m 12s
Exporting an EPUB 3 and a fixed-layout EPUB 09m 16s
Inserting HTML and Edge content 09m 59s
7. Interactive Form Design 28m 04s
Reviewing the new Form tools 07m 21s
Creating and previewing a basic form 14m 40s
Testing the form in Acrobat 06m 03s
8. Production Helpers 21m 24s
Aligning selections to a key object 02m 17s
Using Save As to create a file for earlier versions of InDesign 01m 40s
Retaining table headers and footers 02m 58s
Importing RTFD and exporting to PNG 04m 38s
Using smart math in fields 02m 13s
Exporting interactive PDFs as pages 01m 09s
Previewing and exporting grayscale PDFs 02m 22s
Using the new world language support 04m 07s
Conclusion 01m 06s
Next steps 01m 06s

InDesign is an essential tool for design firms, ad agencies, magazines, newspapers, book publishers, and freelance designers around the world. This course presents the core features and techniques that make this powerful page layout application fun and easy to use. Author David Blatner shows how to navigate and customize the workspace, manage documents and pages, work with text frames and graphics, export and print finished documents, explore creating interactive documents, and much more. He also covers popular topics such as EPUBs and long documents and includes advice on working with overset text, unnamed colors, and other troublesome issues that may arise for first-time designers.
Topics include:
* Getting started in just 30 minutes: the quick start guide to InDesign
* Understanding your workspace
* Creating and setting up new documents
* Creating and applying master pages
* Entering and editing text
* Placing graphics
* Working with color and gradients
* Editing frame and path shapes
* Working with layers, objects, and groups
* Rotating and scaling objects
* Applying character and paragraph formatting
* Using styles
* Creating and formatting tables
* Exporting to EPUB and interactive PDF
* Packaging, printing, and exporting your final document

$30

Content:

Adobe InDesign 1m 23s
What is InDesign? 1m 23s
Introduction 2m 38s
Welcome 1m 0s
Using the exercise files 1m 38s
1. Learn InDesign in Thirty Minutes 21m 19s
Getting started 3m 33s
Adding or editing text 3m 23s
Adding or replacing graphics 4m 31s
Moving objects around 4m 55s
Printing and creating a PDF 4m 57s
2. Understanding Your Workspace 26m 6s
Exploring the application window 6m 25s
Navigating and magnifying pages and objects 6m 24s
Setting rulers and measurements 2m 35s
Working with panels 3m 58s
Setting the view quality of artwork 2m 31s
Adjusting view and preview settings 4m 13s
3. Creating a Document 27m 52s
Creating new documents 7m 39s
Saving and reverting documents 4m 2s
Saving for CS4 and CS5 with IDML 2m 24s
Setting the margin and column guides 4m 29s
Putting ruler guides on the page 5m 7s
Bleeding colors or images off the side of the page 4m 11s
4. Managing Pages 23m 37s
Inserting, deleting, and moving pages 4m 32s
Changing page size 4m 38s
Creating and applying master pages 5m 18s
Overriding master page items 2m 43s
Adding page numbering 2m 22s
Changing page numbering with sections 4m 4s
5. Text 52m 47s
Understanding text frames 3m 38s
Typing and editing text 4m 48s
Inserting special characters 4m 1s
Importing text 3m 47s
Threading text frames 3m 12s
Setting text frame columns 4m 31s
Setting text inset and vertical justification options 3m 48s
Allowing text frames to grow and shrink 4m 5s
Putting text on a path 5m 50s
Using the Story Editor 5m 10s
Checking spelling 5m 12s
Using Find/Change 4m 45s
6. Graphics 28m 19s
Importing graphics 8m 20s
Using the Links panel 7m 17s
Editing graphics in their original app 3m 10s
Fitting graphics to the frame 5m 1s
Taking advantage of image transparency and clipping paths 4m 31s
7. Formatting Objects 35m 49s
Selecting objects 5m 2s
Applying basic strokes and fills 5m 6s
Colorizing images 1m 59s
Adjusting transparency 4m 4s
Adding drop shadows 3m 33s
Using other transparency effects 5m 15s
Copying and formatting with the Eyedropper tool 5m 59s
Finding and changing object formatting 4m 51s
8. Color 18m 34s
Creating color swatches 4m 33s
Understanding the danger and power of unnamed colors 5m 46s
Creating gradient swatches 3m 53s
Applying gradients 4m 22s
9. Frames and Paths 15m 27s
Editing frame and path shapes 5m 8s
Adding rounded corners and other corner options 4m 8s
Making polygons and starbursts 1m 59s
Creating text outlines 4m 12s
10. Managing Objects 37m 56s
Positioning objects with the Gap tool 3m 54s
Stacking objects 2m 5s
Creating and controlling layers 5m 27s
Managing objects in the Layers panel 3m 33s
Grouping and locking objects 3m 10s
Nesting objects 3m 23s
Aligning and distributing objects 4m 20s
Understanding text wrap 5m 51s
Using anchored objects 6m 13s
11. Transforming Objects 26m 16s
Duplicating objects 5m 37s
Collecting, conveying, and placing content 8m 58s
Rotating objects 2m 22s
Scaling objects 4m 21s
Skewing objects 1m 8s
Mirroring objects 3m 50s
12. Character Formatting 24m 19s
Applying basic character styling 7m 31s
Applying advanced character formatting 4m 28s
Changing case 3m 23s
Using Find/Change for text formatting 5m 3s
Using Find Font 3m 54s
13. Paragraph Formatting 33m 10s
Applying formatting to a paragraph 4m 4s
Spanning a paragraph across multiple columns 2m 10s
Splitting a paragraph into multiple columns 1m 52s
Using drop caps 3m 26s
Setting tabs 7m 55s
Adding rules (lines) above or below a paragraph 3m 23s
Adding automatic bullets 4m 10s
Numbering paragraphs 6m 10s
14. Styles 19m 47s
Creating and applying paragraph styles 6m 10s
Using character styles 4m 45s
Editing and redefining styles 2m 20s
Using object styles 2m 47s
Applying styles with Quick Apply 3m 45s
15. Tables 40m 25s
Creating a table 4m 29s
Adjusting rows and columns 4m 36s
Adding and deleting rows and columns 3m 0s
Formatting a table 4m 32s
Formatting cells 6m 2s
Applying table styles 5m 33s
Placing graphics in cells 3m 18s
Importing Microsoft Word and Excel tables 8m 55s
16. Long Documents 16m 45s
Building a multi-document book 7m 27s
Creating "continued on..." jump lines 3m 51s
Constructing a table of contents (TOC) 5m 27s
17. Interactive Documents 23m 8s
Exporting EPUBs 6m 12s
Creating an interactive PDF 12m 49s
Building a Flash SWF 4m 7s
18. Packaging, Printing, and Exporting 28m 1s
Checking a document with the Preflight panel 5m 26s
Packaging for output 3m 34s
Using the Print dialog box 4m 52s
Printing a small booklet 2m 46s
Exporting a PDF 7m 56s
Exporting text 3m 27s
Conclusion 1m 25s
Next steps 1m 25s

InDesign CS6 is desktop publishing software for the age of mobile, offering state-of-the-art features like Adaptive Design Tools, which let you repurpose layouts to look great on a variety of page sizes, orientations, and devices. And of course it does everything you expect InDesign to do, giving you precise control over text, images, and colors so you can create amazing designs. In this Learn by Video course (created in partnership with our friends at Peachpit Press), Adobe Certified Expert Kelly McCathran takes an in-depth look at InDesign CS6, from the very basics to advanced features like book-building and dynamic content.

$30

Content:

The InDesign Interface and Workspace
InDesign's Workspace
07:25
Using InDesign's Tools
08:29
Navigating Documents and Panels
08:58
Setting the Best Preferences
15:32
Building a New Document and Saving a Preset
09:57
Creating and Formatting Text
10:54
Changing Text Color and Paragraph Settings
07:21
Working with Graphics
06:47
Working with Frames
11:59
InDesign Project Explorations
Placing and Formatting Text
09:05
Intro to Paragraph Styles
09:47
More Paragraph Styles
09:29
Editing Styles for Global Updates
06:59
Master Pages and Page Numbers
07:25
Creating or Adding Columns
07:43
Placing Images and Wrapping Text
07:44
Creating Letterhead
09:09
Building a Newsletter
09:25
Adding a Table of Contents and Jump Page Numbers
10:15
Using Selection Tools
06:39
Placing, Scaling, and Aligning Several Images with Multi-Place
06:30
Creating the Front of a Postcard
08:09
Creating the Back of a Postcard
06:56
Color Me Happy
Creating Colors and Adding Swatches
06:50
Creating a "Color Story" with the Kuler Panel
08:30
Adding "Spot" or Pantone® Colors
06:28
Drawing with Shapes and Lines
10:24
Creating Gradients
14:51
Creating Special Effects
08:23
Building Object Styles
07:35
Using a Clipping Path or Silhouette to Create Depth
03:10
High-End Text Handling
Building Character Styles
03:11
Creating Nested Styles
03:37
Nested Styles for the Power User
09:20
Removing Text Formatting and Relinking Word Styles to InDesign Styles
07:16
Hyphenation Settings and Widow/Orphan Control
07:54
Setting Tabs
09:18
Moving Beyond the Basic Tab Settings
09:12
Favorite Typography Keyboard Shortcuts
09:34
Using Find Font to Replace Missing Fonts
04:01
Custom Bullets and the Glyphs Panel
08:23
All About Pages
Using Custom Page Numbers
04:49
Creating a Section
06:19
Building a Table of Contents
10:37
Creating Facing-Page (Spread) Layouts
08:36
Building Libraries for Frequently Used Content
09:23
Working with Multiple Master Pages and Referenced Master Pages
07:38
Unlocking and Resetting Master Page Items
05:17
Adding Layers to Your Document
06:49
Isolating, Moving, and Selecting Objects with Layers
04:17
Layout Adjustment
03:03
Using Liquid Layout
05:40
Alternate Layouts
06:53
Fun with Images
Dragging and Dropping from Mini Bridge
04:20
Dynamic Captions and Adobe Bridge
03:20
Creating a Clipping Path (Silhouette)
05:45
The Align Panel
06:49
The Pathfinder Panel
08:04
Anchored Objects
04:49
The Links Panel
05:37
The Content Collector and Content Placer Tools
02:21
Book Features
Creating Document Templates
02:10
Building a Book
04:18
Synchronizing Colors and Styles in a Book
03:17
Building a Table of Contents for a Book
03:05
Creating Folding Spreads
04:40
Dynamic Content
Creating Hyperlinks and Building Buttons
07:14
Building Document-Wide Navigation
04:53
Animating Content
06:37
Creating Motion Paths
03:31
Adding Object States
04:13
Output
Preflight and Packaging
08:52
The Separations Preview and Ink Manager Panels
04:37
Printing
03:41
InDesign Color Settings
02:41
Exporting to PDF and Loading PDF Settings
07:40

Join Adobe InDesign and publishing expert Mike Rankin as he explains how to use InDesign to design a wide range of digital documents, including interactive PDFs and apps for the iPad. This course provides a tour of digital publishing trends and shows how to bring these trends to bear in various projects, such as a slide presentation, a PDF form, and an interactive portfolio. Mike also introduces the Adobe Digital Publishing Suite and shows how to publish dynamic interactive documents to the iPad and other mobile devices.
Topics include:

  • Examining trends in digital design
  • Setting preferences for interactive documents
  • Understanding intent and presets
  • Working with images and swatches
  • Creating and working with interactive PDFs
  • Creating alternate layouts for multiple screens
  • Linking text and page items
  • Fitting frames to content
  • Setting up a file with layers
  • Creating a slideshow with transitions and hyperlinks
  • Building a table of contents
  • Adding a SWF slideshow to a PDF
  • Placing video
  • Creating PDF forms
  • Adding animation
  • Working with the Digital Publishing Suite

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 45s
Welcome 1m 2s
Using the exercise files and scripts 43s
1. Exploring Trends in Digital Design 22m 41s
Case study: tomaxxi's InDesign shortcuts guide 4m 19s
Case study: The Magic of Reality app 3m 20s
Exploring PDF digital magazines: InDesign Magazine 2m 45s
Looking at digital newspapers: BostonGlobe.com 3m 44s
Reviewing digital magazines: National Geographic 4m 58s
Exploring iamboundless.com 3m 35s
2. Setting Up InDesign for Designing Digital Documents 21m 56s
Setting preferences for interactive documents 6m 32s
Customizing the workspace 5m 48s
Understanding intent and presets 3m 5s
Working with images and swatches 5m 2s
Installing scripts 1m 29s
3. Creating Documents for Multiple Screens 37m 24s
Using Liquid Layout 9m 17s
Creating alternate layouts 4m 4s
Using primary text frames 3m 49s
Using the Content Conveyor 5m 42s
Linking text 4m 32s
Linking page items 3m 19s
Fitting frames to content 3m 33s
Using style mapping 3m 8s
4. Building an Interactive PDF Presentation 49m 48s
Reviewing what we're going to build 1m 56s
Previewing with the SWF Preview panel 4m 51s
Presentation design tips 2m 41s
Setting up a presentation file with layers 4m 53s
Creating a navigation system 8m 32s
Creating a title and content slides 7m 57s
Overriding master page items 5m 59s
Setting page transitions 4m 34s
Creating hyperlinks 3m 40s
Using the slug for notes 4m 45s
5. Building an Interactive PDF Catalog 37m 40s
Understanding what we're going to build 1m 11s
Building an interactive table of contents 5m 9s
Building a navigation system 4m 5s
Creating PDF-only buttons 3m 33s
Using a SWF slideshow in a PDF 9m 33s
Placing a video and using the Media panel 5m 44s
Setting navigation points 4m 28s
Placing a video from a URL 1m 21s
Creating hyperlinks from URLs 2m 36s
6. Working with PDF Forms 18m 6s
An overview of PDF forms 2m 6s
Creating text fields and signature fields 3m 13s
Creating list boxes and combo boxes 3m 55s
Creating checkboxes and radio buttons 3m 47s
Creating tab order for PDF forms 3m 14s
Creating Submit, Print, and Clear Form actions 1m 51s
7. Incorporating Animation and SWF Files in a Portfolio 53m 36s
Exploring the Animation Encyclopedia script 10m 57s
Using the Animation panel 6m 56s
Animating on a motion path 3m 57s
Animating a list 4m 29s
Creating navigation buttons 5m 15s
Creating a multi-state object 6m 23s
Creating a page number indicator 2m 57s
Animating an opening page 3m 9s
Creating a multi-purpose button 3m 11s
Exporting your presentation and embedded fonts to SWF 3m 46s
Working with transitions and animation 2m 36s
8. Digital Publishing Suite (DPS), Part 1 40m 34s
An overview of the DPS workflow and the publishing process 4m 31s
Creating hyperlinks 5m 17s
Creating slideshows 3m 25s
Using the Image Sequence feature 4m 58s
Adding audio and video 5m 6s
Creating panoramas 4m 21s
Adding web content 3m 56s
Panning and zooming 4m 1s
Creating scrollable frames 4m 59s
9. Digital Publishing Suite (DPS), Part 2 27m 18s
Using the Folio Builder panel 5m 28s
Creating a folio 5m 28s
Adding articles to a folio 5m 47s
Using the Content Viewer to preview a folio 3m 53s
Using the Folio Producer 4m 54s
Viewing a folio on an iPad 1m 48s
Conclusion 49s
Next steps 49s

In this course, author Anne-Marie Concepción shows publishers, designers, and production assistants how to use Adobe InDesign CS6 to create print books for the exploding ebook market. Starting from an overview of how ebooks are bought, sold, and read, the course shows how to prepare existing InDesign files for optimal EPUB conversion, and how to design new projects for a dual print/EPUB output. Anne-Marie also demonstrates how to embed video and fonts in reflowable ebooks, and how to customize the internal markup for various devices, including converting files to the Kindle format. Finally, discover how to set up publisher accounts at the major ebook distribution channels, such as iBookstore, or even sell ebooks directly to readers on your own ecommerce site.
Topics include:

  • Understanding the differences between ebook formats
  • Best practices for InDesign file preparation
  • Managing the content flow with Layout order and the Articles panel
  • Using free InDesign scripts to automate EPUB productions
  • Optimizing images, charts, and tables
  • Opening and examining EPUB files
  • Editing important CSS and HTML tags
  • Including drop caps, pull quotes, and text wraps
  • Enriching your EPUBs with video and embedded fonts
  • Acquiring an ISBN for ebooks
  • Converting EPUBs to Kindle format (MOBI and KF8)
  • Distributing ebooks with resellers and aggregators

$30

Content:

Introduction4m 27s
Welcome 1m 6s
Using the exercise files 1m 9s
A word about software versions 2m 12s
1. Ebook Overview21m 26s
What is an ebook? 13m 41s
How do I find and sell ebooks? 7m 45s
2. EPUB Production Basics32m 17s
Examining the EPUB file format 6m 39s
How does an INDD file become an EPUB? 5m 52s
Understanding what can and can't be converted from INDD to EPUB 10m 20s
Setting up an EPUB workspace 5m 13s
Installing scripts 4m 13s
3. Preparing an InDesign Publication for EPUB Export 1h 11m
Naming files for EPUB compatibility 14m 34s
Creating a navigation table of contents (TOC) with a TOC style 6m 47s
Creating chapter breaks based on a paragraph style 5m 24s
Creating a navigation TOC with an InDesign book 4m 19s
Using a TOC style in combination with an InDesign book 5m 27s
Managing the sequence of content 8m 12s
Using the layout order to manage content flow 11m 30s
Using the Articles panel to manage content flow 15m 36s
4. Modifying Text and Images for EPUB Export 1h 16m
Maintaining text frame spacing 7m 2s
Cleaning up text with Find/Change and the FindChangeByList script 10m 44s
Converting local formatting to styles 9m 1s
Using free scripts to automate text formatting 8m 5s
Mapping paragraph styles to CSS tags 8m 15s
Preparing tables for optimal conversion 10m 20s
Adding a custom TOC as the first page of an EPUB file 8m 24s
Including fonts in an EPUB 8m 9s
Adding metadata to the InDesign file or book 6m 51s
5. Optimizing Images for EPUB Export58m 2s
Adding alt tags to images and objects 9m 36s
Converting InDesign objects to images 6m 48s
Specifying image resolution and appearance 10m 6s
Setting image position controls 8m 27s
Working with PNG and transparency 8m 3s
Creating a cover image 7m 29s
Adding video to the EPUB 7m 33s
6. Exporting to EPUB2 and EPUB3 19m 13s
Choosing general export options 7m 6s
Choosing export options for images 5m 53s
Choosing advanced export options 6m 14s
7. Previewing and Validating EPUB Files26m 21s
Previewing EPUBs on your computer 9m 3s
Previewing for the iBooks app 9m 50s
Validating EPUB2 and EPUB3 files 7m 28s
8. Editing EPUB Files for Functionality39m 43s
Getting inside an EPUB file 4m 52s
Understanding the anatomy of EPUB2 and EPUB3 files 7m 39s
Choosing an EPUB editor 7m 25s
Using Dreamweaver to edit EPUBs 5m 38s
Modifying the navigational TOC 4m 57s
Adding and editing metadata 4m 2s
Creating a guide section for iBooks 5m 10s
9. Editing EPUB Files for Formatting40m 58s
Editing the XHTML files and using GREP 11m 38s
Editing the CSS file to tweak formatting 8m 52s
Setting up line, margin, and paragraph spacing 5m 41s
Creating pull quotes and text wraps 7m 51s
Creating internal and external links 6m 56s
10. Converting an EPUB to Other Ebook Formats35m 20s
Exploring the Kindle Direct Publishing (KDP) portal 5m 36s
Designing for the Kindle MOBI and KF8 formats 9m 41s
Using Kindle Plugin for InDesign 9m 52s
Converting with KindleGen and Kindle Previewer 4m 43s
Converting EPUB for other resellers 5m 28s
11. Distributing Your Ebook21m 41s
Getting an ISBN for each edition 3m 29s
Getting your ebook into the Kindle Store, iBookstore, or NOOK Store 9m 47s
Using third-party aggregators 4m 14s
Selling from your own website or ecommerce site 4m 11s
Conclusion4m 52s
Next steps 4m 52s

With InDesign CS6 and a Creative Cloud subscription it has gotten a whole lot easier to create an unlimited number of applications for the iPad. Join Terry White, worldwide Creative Suite Design Evangelist for Adobe Systems, as he takes you through every step in the process for creating an iPad app from scratch up to submitting it for approval in the App Store. You’ll learn what software is required to complete each phase of the project, how to create alternate versions for vertical and horizontal orientations, how to add various forms of interactivity, and how to build the final app itself.

$30

Content:

Introduction (03:21) Join Terry as he introduces the class and goes over what you'll need to complete the project.
Digital Publishing Suite Tools (02:36) Before you get started you'll want to download and install the Digital Publishing Suite tools.
An Example App (06:43) To get an idea of where you are headed it can help to take a walk through a finished product before diving into the production of your own.
Structure and Terminology (04:16) Understanding the structure of the app and the terminology of the components is needed to move forward.
Building an Article (15:54) Learn how to set up and start building your first document that will be part of your app.
Adding Music and Alternate View (09:10) With the vertical version completed you can now add music and create the alternate (horizontal) view.
Creating Interactivity (11:39) Add interactivity into your app is a fun way to engage your audience. Terry demonstrates a few different types of interaction.
Slideshows Part 1 (10:01) There are various ways to do slideshows, and it really just depends on what you are looking to do.
Slideshows Part 2 (09:18) Terry demonstrates another variation on the slideshow.
Rotating Interactivity (06:39) There are two types of rotating interactivity you can build into your app.
Including Video (08:23) You can also include actual video clips for your audience to view.
Including Web Content (11:01) When considering the inclusion of web content you can either link to existing content on the web or you can incorporate the content into the app itself. There are tradeoffs either way.
Create Links to Your Content (06:28) It is important to link your various bits of content together within the app.
Building the Folio (07:05) Before you can build the final app you need to build the folio.
Building the Application (10:00) With the folio designed and built you can use the Folio Builder to create the app.
Conclusion (01:54) Terry wraps up the class with a quick review of what was covered and where to go from here.

In this InDesign CS6 tutorial we will learn about a powerful new feature set added to InDesign CS6 that will allow us to create layouts that can be easily flexed to fit virtually any shape or size. We’ll get started by learning about liquid layout and the rules that govern it in InDesign CS6. Not only will we go over each rule in depth but we’ll also learn about instances where one rule may be better than the others. From here we’ll learn how we can create alternate versions of the same layout, all within the same InDesign file. To wrap this course up, we will take everything we’ve learned and apply it to a vertical iPad layout, converting it into two different alternate layouts. After completing this tutorial, not only will you be familiar with this powerful new feature set but you will also learn how it can save you time when working on a layout that is needed in multiple shape and sizes.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Understanding Liquid Layout and it's basic rules
03. Applying the scale and re-center liquid page rules
04. Applying the guide-based liquid page rule
05. Applying the object-based liquid page rule
06. Applying the based-on-master liquid page rule
07. Using Liquid Layout rules with more complex layouts
08. Creating alternate layouts
09. Creating alternate layouts for iPad
10. Creating alternate layouts for iPhone

Adobe InDesign CS6: Advanced picks up where the Beginner course left off. Long-time VTC author Brian White introduces you to InDesign's advanced features which will take your knowledge of the software to the next level. The course begins with a thorough look at text, graphic, and special-effect features before progressing through the creation of tables and long documents. Brian then shifts into InDesign's powerful interactive features. Starting with the new PDR interactive forms, the course then covers interactive PDF & SWF. The chapter on the Digital Publishing Suite shows you how to get a publication created for the iPad. The course then concludes with an introduction to e-pub documents. To begin learning today, simply click on the movie links.

$30

Content:

Introduction
Welcome
New Features Overview
Using the Included Work Files
Advanced Text Features
Missing Fonts pt. 1
Missing Fonts pt. 2
Special Characters pt. 1
Special Characters pt. 2
Type on a Path pt. 1
Type on a Path pt. 2
Intro to Conditional Text
Advanced Conditional Text pt. 1
Advanced Conditional Text pt. 2
Find-Change Text
Find-Change GREP
Find-Change Glyphs
Advanced Graphic Features
Gap Tool
Live Captions pt. 1
Live Captions pt. 2
Creating Masks
Alphas / Clips / Transparencies
Object Layer Options
Inline Graphics
Anchored Objects pt. 1
Anchored Objects pt. 2
Embed InDesign Files
Library
Snippets
Effects
Transparency pt. 1
Transparency pt. 2
Drop Shadows pt. 1
Drop Shadows pt. 2
Inner Shadow & Glow
Bevel & Emboss
Satin
Feathering
Tables
Intro to Tables
Importing Data pt. 1
Importing Data pt. 2
Creating Tables
Navigating Tables
Add / Delete / Merge
Cell Formatting
Table Styles pt. 1
Table Styles pt. 2
Cell Styles pt. 1
Cell Styles pt. 2
Inserting Images
Finishing Touches
Long Document Features
Introduction
Section & Page Numbering
Frame & Para Styles pt. 1
Frame & Para Styles pt. 2
Multiple Master Pages
Templates
Sections
Creating a Book
Page Numbering
Book Synchronization
Footnotes pt. 1
Footnotes pt. 2
Cross References pt. 1
Cross References pt. 2
Creating an Index pt. 1
Creating an Index pt. 2
Table of Contents
Printing
Creating PDF Forms
New Form Tools
Buttons
Text Fields
List Fields
Combo Fields
Check / Radio Buttons pt. 1
Check / Radio Buttons pt. 2
Sign / Submit / Print / Clear
Tabs & Acrobat Options
Interactive PDF
Intro to PDF Interactive
Creating Navigation
Rollover Buttons
Creating Destinations
Show / Hide Buttons pt. 1
Show / Hide Buttons pt. 2
Adding SWF
Adding Multimedia
Hyperlinks
Transitions
SWF Animation
Intro to Animation
Motion Paths
Triggers
Timing
Building an Ad pt. 1
Building an Ad pt. 2
Building an Ad pt. 3
Building an Ad pt. 4
Building an Ad pt. 5
Multi-State Objects pt.1
Multi-State Objects pt.2
Exporting SWF
Digital Publishing Suite
DPS Overview
DPS Workflow
Creating a Folio
Adding Articles
Hyperlinks
Slideshows
Image Sequences
Audio & Video
Panoramas
Web Content
Pan & Zoom
Scrollable Frames
Uploading the Folio pt. 1
Uploading the Folio pt. 2
E-Books
Intro to E-Books
What You Can and Cannot Do
Page Export Order
Articles Panel
Working with Images
Creating a Cover
Hyperlinks
Mapping Styles
Title Info & Page Breaks
Navigational ToC
Validating EPUB
Editing EPUB Code
ISBN
Publishing an E-Book
Conclusion
Course Wrap Up
Credits
About the Author

 

Get the ultimate foundation in Adobe Photoshop CC, in this update to Deke McClelland's flagship series Photoshop One-on-One. Deke takes you on a personalized tour of the basic tools and techniques that lie behind great images and graphic design, while keeping you up to speed with the newest features offered with Creative Cloud. Learn to open images from multiple sources, get around the panels and menus, and work with layers—the feature that allows you to perform masking, combine effects, and perform other edits nondestructively. Then Deke shows how to perform important editing tasks, such as cropping and straightening images, adjusting the luminance of your image, correcting color imbalances and enhancing color creatively, and finally, retouching and healing, so you can make sure you're always putting your subject's best face forward.

$30

Content:

1. Opening an Image 31m 57s
Welcome to One-on-One 1m 51s
Opening from the Windows desktop 5m 35s
Opening from the Macintosh Finder 7m 14s
Opening from Photoshop or Bridge 3m 52s
Opening an image from Mini Bridge 2m 39s
Opening through Camera Raw 5m 11s
Closing one image and closing all 5m 35s
2. Getting Around 49m 25s
Navigating your image 40s
The dark vs. the light interface 3m 12s
Navigating tabs and windows 4m 32s
Panels and workspaces 6m 20s
Zooming incrementally 6m 22s
Zooming continuously 2m 43s
Entering a custom zoom value 2m 25s
Scrolling and panning images 2m 31s
Rotating and resetting the view 2m 11s
Cycling between screen modes 3m 10s
Using the Navigator panel 3m 38s
Using Retina and HiDPI displays 4m 3s
Adjusting a few screen preferences 7m 38s
3. Image Size and Resolution 1h 2m
Digital imaging fundamentals 1m 45s
Image size and resolution 6m 34s
The Image Size command 6m 9s
Common resolution standards 4m 7s
Upsampling vs. real pixels 7m 59s
Changing the print size 8m 15s
Downsampling for print 5m 14s
Downsampling for email 6m 22s
The interpolation settings 6m 40s
Downsampling advice 5m 5s
Upsampling advice 4m 15s
4. Using Layers 53m 20s
The layered composition 1m 40s
Introducing the Layers panel 4m 12s
Adding, scaling, and aligning layers 5m 27s
Dragging and dropping layers 4m 36s
Stack, reveal, and rename 3m 1s
Opacity, history, and blend mode 6m 5s
Duplicating a selected portion of a layer 5m 32s
Applying a clipping mask 3m 58s
Blending inside a clipping mask 4m 10s
Finishing off your artwork 3m 13s
Creating a new layer and background 4m 24s
Layering tips and tricks 7m 2s
5. Saving Your Progress 26m 13s
The art of the save 54s
Four things to know about saving 5m 59s
Saving layers to PSD 6m 34s
Saving print images to TIFF 4m 48s
Saving an interactive image to PNG 3m 40s
Saving a flat photo to JPEG 4m 18s
6. Crop and Straighten 25m 32s
Honing in on your image 1m 43s
The new and improved Crop tool 4m 35s
Editing your last crop 6m 29s
Straightening a crooked image 5m 57s
Filling in missing details 4m 44s
Using the Perspective Crop tool 2m 4s
7. Adjusting Luminance 44m 51s
First, there is brightness 2m 12s
How luminance works 4m 18s
The three Auto commands 3m 27s
Automatic brightness and contrast 6m 5s
The Brightness/Contrast command 2m 47s
The dynamic adjustment layer 4m 4s
Editing adjustment layers 3m 52s
Isolating an adjustment with a layer mask 3m 31s
Introducing the histogram 4m 58s
Measuring an adjustment 3m 34s
Using the Shadows/Highlights command 6m 3s
8. Adjusting Colors 44m 33s
And second, there is color 1m 31s
Identifying a color cast 3m 34s
Correcting a color cast automatically 3m 57s
Changing the color balance 6m 10s
Compensating with Photo Filter 3m 11s
Adjusting color intensity with Vibrance 3m 29s
Correcting color casts in Camera Raw 5m 46s
The Hue/Saturation command 5m 26s
Summoning colors where none exist 4m 8s
Making more color with Vibrance 4m 27s
Making a quick-and-dirty sepia tone 2m 54s
9. Select and Edit 55m 46s
Making selective modifications 1m 10s
The geometric Marquee tools 6m 1s
Aligning one image element to another 4m 59s
The freeform Lasso tools 3m 59s
The Polygonal Lasso tool and Quick Mask 5m 19s
Cropping one selection inside another 6m 15s
Creating rays of light 4m 44s
Quick Selection and Similar 4m 11s
Making it better with Refine Edge 4m 56s
Integrating image elements 2m 39s
Magic Wand and Grow 5m 17s
Refine, integrate, and complete 6m 16s
10. Retouch and Heal 53m 49s
Your best face forward 1m 0s
Content-Aware Fill 6m 11s
Using the Spot Healing Brush 5m 36s
The more capable "standard" Healing Brush 5m 55s
Meet the Clone Source panel 3m 53s
Caps Lock and Fade 4m 57s
The Dodge and Burn tools 5m 1s
Adjusting color with the Brush tool 6m 35s
Smoothing skin textures 5m 58s
Brightening teeth 4m 0s
Intensifying eyes 4m 43s
Conclusion 50s
Until next time 50s

Photoshop CC One-on-One is back, and this installment teaches you how to build on your basic knowledge and achieve next-level effects with this premiere image-editing program. Industry pro Deke McClelland shows you how to seamlessly move and patch areas of a photo with the Content-Aware toolset; stretch the brightness of a scene with automatic and custom Levels adjustments; create intricate designs with text and shapes; and morph an image with layer effects and transformations. Deke also shares his techniques for sharpening details, whether addressing noise and highlight/shadow clipping or camera shake, and converting a full-color image to black and white. The final chapters show you how to best print and save images for the web, making sure all your hard work pays off in the final output.

$30

Content:

Introduction 2m 4s
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 4s
11. The Content-Aware Collection 29m 46s
The best of Photoshop automation 35s
Introducing the Patch tool 3m 43s
Using Content-Aware Patch 5m 42s
Retouching with Content-Aware Patch 2m 5s
Using the Content-Aware Move tool 3m 9s
Using Content-Aware Extend 2m 4s
The Content-Aware Scale command 6m 35s
Scaling in multiple passes 2m 22s
Protecting skin tones 3m 31s
12. Adjusting Levels 32m 55s
Editing the histogram 1m 50s
The new automatic Levels adjustment 4m 33s
Customizing a Levels adjustment 4m 53s
Understanding the Gamma value 2m 7s
Opening up the shadows 2m 48s
Previewing clipped pixels 3m 40s
Retouching with Output Levels 4m 25s
Making channel-by-channel adjustments 2m 19s
Faking a gray card in post 2m 51s
Assigning shortcuts to adjustment layers 3m 29s
13. Sharpening Details 57m 43s
How sharpening works 1m 38s
Introducing the Smart Sharpen filter 6m 56s
Understanding the Radius value 5m 20s
Gauging the best sharpening settings 5m 45s
Addressing color artifacts and clipping 5m 49s
The Remove and Reduce Noise options 4m 22s
The Shadows/Highlights options 7m 36s
Correcting for camera shake 6m 47s
Sharpening with the Emboss filter 5m 45s
Sharpening with the High Pass filter 4m 44s
Painting in sharpness 3m 1s
14. Creating and Formatting Text 1h 9m
Vector-based type 1m 35s
Creating and editing point text 5m 58s
Font and type style tricks 7m 10s
Type size and color tricks 6m 42s
Kerning and tracking characters 8m 7s
Creating and editing area text 3m 50s
Selecting and formatting paragraphs 6m 36s
Setting text inside a custom path 5m 32s
Creating text along a path 6m 12s
Adjusting baseline shift 4m 45s
Creating and stylizing a logo 6m 49s
Masking text into image elements 6m 14s
15. Drawing Shapes 1h 0m
The other vector-based layer 1m 39s
Dotted borders and corner roundness 8m 14s
Drawing and aligning custom shapes 3m 55s
Creating your own repeatable custom shape 5m 43s
Selecting paths and isolating layers 4m 11s
Combining simple shapes to make complex ones 5m 50s
Cropping, adjusting, and merging shapes 6m 22s
Creating a soft, synthetic sparkle 6m 42s
Saving a resolution-independent PDF file 8m 48s
Turning a small image into a huge one 8m 38s
16. Layer Effects 1h 14m
Depth, contour, and texture 1m 28s
Imparting depth with a layer effect 9m 9s
The power of the drop shadow 7m 37s
Modifying a layer and its effects 6m 21s
Saving custom default settings 4m 12s
Creating a custom contour 8m 5s
Introducing Bevel and Emboss 8m 8s
Multiple effects and multiple layers 7m 45s
Global Light and rasterizing effects 8m 5s
Gloss and surface contour 6m 4s
Adding texture to Bevel and Emboss 7m 21s
17. Paragraph, Character, and Layer Styles 34m 48s
Styles store settings 1m 38s
Creating and applying a paragraph style 3m 41s
Redefining a style and styling a word 5m 38s
Creating and styling a placeholder style 5m 43s
Applying and creating layer styles 5m 45s
Loading and customizing layer styles 5m 42s
Merging and saving layer styles 6m 41s
18. Scale, Rotate, Skew, and Warp 56m 48s
Meet the transformations 1m 55s
Transformations and Smart Objects 5m 46s
Adjusting the interpolation setting 5m 10s
Rotating a layer with Free Transform 5m 22s
Scale, duplicate, and repeat 4m 30s
Creating a synthetic star field 5m 20s
Warping a logo with Arc and Flag 5m 34s
Distort, perspective, and skew 4m 15s
Using transformations to draw and correct 7m 0s
Bolstering text with layer effects 5m 43s
Adding highlights with Lens Flare 6m 13s
19. Liquifying an Image 43m 36s
Removing the weight that the camera adds 1m 7s
The Warp and Reconstruct tools 6m 44s
Brush size, hardness, and opacity 4m 29s
The Pucker, Bloat, Push, and Twirl tools 7m 12s
Saving and reapplying Liquify settings 4m 9s
Lifting and slimming details 9m 42s
Warping legs, arms, and fabric 5m 33s
Improving a model's posture 4m 40s
20. Converting to Black and White 58m 46s
Shoot in color, convert to black and white 1m 55s
Three ways to grayscale 5m 36s
Mixing a custom black-and-white image 7m 31s
Simulating an infrared photograph 6m 39s
Creating a sienna-infused sepia tone 5m 38s
Creating a hyper-saturated image 5m 26s
Introducing the Black & White command 3m 16s
Customizing the Black & White settings 4m 50s
Black & White meets the Channel Mixer 7m 29s
Infusing an image with tint and color 5m 9s
Grayscale and Split Tone in Camera Raw 5m 17s
21. Printing an Image 41m 34s
The many ways to print 1m 41s
Using the test document 3m 18s
Print, position, and size 5m 57s
Description and printing marks 3m 3s
Establishing a bleed 3m 44s
Getting reliable color 5m 54s
Special printing options 5m 1s
Previewing an image at print size 4m 16s
Creating contact sheets 4m 49s
Creating a multipage PDF 3m 51s
22. Saving for the Web 31m 9s
Making Internet imagery 1m 6s
Introducing Save for Web 4m 39s
Creating the perfect JPEG image 5m 14s
Creating a high-contrast GIF image 6m 23s
The two varieties of PNG 3m 57s
Downsampling for the web 5m 59s
Adding copyright and contact info 3m 51s
Conclusion 1m 3s
Until next time 1m 3s

The third part of the popular and comprehensive series Photoshop CC One-on-One follows industry pro Deke McClelland as he plunges into the inner workings of Adobe Photoshop. He shows how to adjust your color, interface, and performance settings to get the best out of your images and the most out of Photoshop, and explores the power of Smart Objects, Shadows/Highlights, and Curves for making subtle, nondestructive adjustments. The course dives into Camera Raw to experiment with the editing toolset there, and returns to Photoshop to discuss toning, blur, and blend modes. Deke also teaches tried-and-true methods for sharpening details and reducing noise, as well as creating quick and accurate selections with Quick Mask, Color Range, and Refine Edge commands.

$30

Content:

Introduction
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 0s
23. Shortcuts and Settings
Adding shortcuts and adjusting preferences 46s
Loading my dekeKeys keyboard shortcuts 4m 36s
Reviewing your new custom keyboard shortcuts 14m 46s
Remapping your Macintosh OS shortcuts 3m 4s
Adjusting a few general preferences 4m 3s
Using the visual HUD color picker 2m 2s
The interface and performance settings 7m 28s
Adjusting Photoshop color settings 8m 2s
24. Smart Objects
Smart Object means "indestructible" 1m 38s
Three ways to place a Smart Object 3m 6s
Copying and pasting from Adobe Illustrator 4m 9s
Transforming and warping a vector object 4m 48s
Blending a Smart Object into a photograph 3m 10s
Blurring with a nested Smart Filter 4m 57s
Editing a Smart Object in Illustrator 3m 25s
Creating "true clones" 3m 50s
Duplicating a group of clones 2m 53s
Breaking the Smart Object link 2m 53s
Editing originals; updating clones 4m 38s
Removing people from a scene with Median 5m 51s
25. Shadows/Highlights
Luminance meets sharpening 1m 2s
Correcting for lens distortion 5m 55s
Introducing Shadows/Highlights 3m 54s
Mitigating halos with Radius values 4m 19s
Enhancing the effects of Midtone Contrast 3m 18s
Creating a "bounce" with Gaussian Blur 3m 29s
Sharpening on top of blur 2m 47s
Masking a group of Smart Filters 2m 53s
Reducing the density of a layer mask 3m 38s
26. Using Curves
How the Curves graph works 2m 40s
Introducing the Curves adjustment 7m 36s
Adding and editing points on a curve 6m 27s
Curves tips and tricks 8m 12s
Correcting a challenging image 6m 33s
Selecting and darkening highlights 4m 39s
Neutralizing colors; smoothing transitions 6m 6s
The new automatic Curves function 6m 55s
27. Camera Raw
Photoshop's digital darkroom 2m 29s
Opening and editing multiple images 8m 1s
Correcting white balance 4m 8s
The revamped Exposure controls 8m 9s
Working with archival Camera Raw images 6m 41s
Retouching with the Spot Removal tool 4m 9s
Using the Graduated Filter tool 4m 52s
Painting edits with the Adjustment Brush 7m 46s
Tone curves (and why you don't need them) 6m 3s
Straighten, crop, and geometric distortions 5m 21s
Auto-upright and manual lens corrections 8m 1s
Vignette, chromatic aberration, and fringe 6m 50s
Selective hue, saturation, and luminance 6m 36s
Working with JPEG and TIFF images 6m 36s
Camera Raw Smart Objects 6m 10s
The Camera Raw filter and Radial Filter tool 7m 34s
Editing Camera Raw images from Bridge 4m 24s
28. Duotones and Colorization
Infusing black and white with color 1m 23s
Creating a professional-quality sepia tone 4m 18s
Introducing the Gradient Map adjustment 5m 42s
Loading a library of custom gradients 3m 48s
Creating a custom quadtone 5m 48s
Colorizing with blend modes and Opacity 4m 6s
Creating a faux-color, high-key effect 7m 25s
29. Noise versus Detail
Noise isn't all bad 1m 28s
Introducing the Reduce Noise filter 7m 29s
Correcting a noisy photo 5m 33s
Smoothing over high-contrast noise 5m 50s
Protecting details with an edge mask 4m 52s
Adjusting overly saturated shadows 3m 36s
Correcting with High Pass and Lens Blur 3m 45s
Masking blur and sharpen layers 6m 42s
Creating texture by adding noise 5m 28s
The Camera Raw Detail panel 7m 8s
Correcting noise and detail in Camera Raw 8m 10s
Adding noise grain and vignetting effects 6m 47s
30. The Blur Gallery
Why blur focuses your attention 1m 27s
Creating a depth-of-field effect with Field Blur 4m 44s
Adjusting your Field Blur settings 5m 0s
Editing and exporting a Field Blur mask 9m 24s
Adding a synthetic light bokeh 6m 15s
Using the Selection Bleed option 6m 40s
Creating a radial blur with Iris Blur 6m 31s
Creating "fake miniatures" with Tilt-Shift 4m 52s
Combining multiple Blur Gallery effects 3m 5s
31. Blend Modes
Blending layers with (basic) math 1m 16s
Using the Dissolve mode 9m 47s
Multiply and the darken modes 8m 30s
Screen and the lighten modes 8m 10s
Cleaning up and integrating a bad photo 6m 38s
Blending inside blend modes 6m 55s
Overlay and the contrast modes 6m 53s
A few great uses for the contrast modes 9m 7s
Difference, Exclusion, Subtract, and Divide 5m 5s
Capturing the differences between images 4m 18s
Hue, Saturation, Color, and Luminosity 4m 45s
Blend mode shortcuts 6m 21s
The Fill Opacity Eight 8m 57s
Using the luminance-exclusion slider bars 8m 8s
32. Color Range and Quick Mask
The best automatic selection functions 1m 14s
Introducing the Color Range command 7m 24s
Selecting a complex image with Color Range 5m 49s
Refining a selection in the Quick Mask mode 7m 4s
Viewing a mask with or without its image 4m 24s
Painting directly inside an alpha channel 5m 39s
Correcting fringes around a masked layer 8m 5s
Turning a layer into a knockout 4m 41s
33. Refine Edge and Layer Masks
The best automatic selection enhancements 1m 28s
Laying down a base layer mask 6m 50s
Introducing the Refine Edge/Mask command 7m 57s
Edge detection and Smart Radius 4m 42s
Using the Refine Radius tool 7m 31s
The transformative power of Refine Edge 3m 37s
Perfecting a mask with overlay painting 10m 58s
Combining Quick Selection with Refine Mask 10m 37s
Bolstering and integrating hair 6m 4s
34. The Pen Tool
Tracing an image point by point 1m 50s
Pixel-based masking versus the Pen tool 6m 45s
Drawing a straight-sided path outline 6m 59s
Moving, deleting, and adding anchor points 6m 10s
Dragging control handles to modify curves 5m 27s
Converting a path outline to a vector mask 5m 35s
Customizing a geometric shape 5m 53s
How to position points and control handles 7m 7s
Drawing smooth points with the Pen tool 8m 7s
Duplicating and scaling a vector mask 5m 21s
Cusp points and the Rubber Band option 6m 51s
Setting anchor points in the pasteboard 6m 8s
Using the Convert Point tool 6m 43s
Conclusion
Until next time 57s

Adobe Photoshop has many powerful features designed specifically for photographers interested in creating better photographs. Learn how to turn them to your advantage with these tutorials from teacher and photographer Chris Orwig. In this introductory course, Chris combines practical tips and creative insights, showing how to enhance and improve your photographs. The course also includes live-action interludes designed to help you think photographically, and shoot with the capabilities of Photoshop in mind.

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 38s
Welcome 1m 0s
Using the exercise files 38s
1. Strategies for Learning Photoshop 4m 42s
Getting the most out of this course 2m 26s
The importance of being relaxed and taking good notes 2m 16s
2. Getting Started with Bridge 26m 29s
Customizing the Bridge workspace 5m 19s
Finding and organizing your images with folders and favorites 4m 32s
Viewing your images at full screen and as a slideshow 6m 40s
Rating, ranking, and filtering your photographs 7m 26s
Opening your photos in Photoshop 2m 32s
3. Setting Up Photoshop 20m 57s
Setting up your color settings 3m 55s
Customizing the interface 5m 14s
Customizing the interface panels 52s
Choosing file-handling and autorecovery options 6m 39s
Improving Photoshop performance 4m 17s
4. Getting Started with Camera Raw 31m 40s
What is Camera Raw? 2m 47s
The Camera Raw interface 3m 4s
Opening images in Camera Raw 2m 59s
Improving your images with the Basic controls 6m 20s
Correcting color and white balance 4m 17s
Creating vivid, saturated colors 4m 27s
Creating a high-contrast black-and-white portrait 4m 3s
Creating a compelling black-and-white landscape 3m 43s
5. Improving Your Photos with Camera Raw 44m 0s
Correcting exposure and recovering highlights 6m 47s
Cropping and straightening your photos 4m 40s
Correcting lens distortions 4m 54s
Retouching with the Spot Removal tool 5m 49s
Making selective adjustments 5m 55s
Improving multiple images at one time 3m 31s
Sharpening and reducing noise 7m 53s
Saving and opening raw files in Photoshop 4m 31s
6. Getting Started with Photoshop 11m 25s
Becoming familiar with the Photoshop interface 4m 23s
Introducing the Tools panel 1m 58s
Zooming in and out on your photographs 5m 4s
7. Opening, Saving, and Viewing Your Photographs 10m 33s
Opening, saving, and closing a photograph 4m 45s
Working with multiple open documents 3m 10s
Arranging and viewing multiple documents 2m 38s
8. Understanding Digital Images and Resizing 24m 34s
The relationship between pixels and image sizing 5m 15s
Resizing an image to a smaller size 4m 10s
Constraining proportions and resetting the Image Size dialog 2m 40s
Using the resizing presets 3m 17s
Quickly increasing your image size 1m 48s
Effectively resizing images to a large size 7m 24s
9. Cropping Your Photographs 17m 38s
Recomposing and cropping your photographs 6m 16s
Cropping your images to a specific size 4m 28s
Cropping and making the horizon level 2m 32s
Using the Marquee tool to crop 4m 22s
10. Working with Layers 37m 52s
Introducing layers 3m 48s
Creating new layers 6m 19s
Duplicating a layer to create a special effect 6m 44s
Combining multiple images together as layers 3m 34s
Creating a layout of multiple images 3m 37s
Applying layer style effects 8m 5s
Changing layer opacity 2m 25s
Organizing and filtering layers 3m 20s
11. Improving Basic Exposure and Tone 15m 38s
Adding brightness and contrast 3m 4s
Fixing an image that is too bright 3m 39s
Brightening the shadow areas of a photo 3m 28s
Correcting overexposure 5m 27s
12. Making Selections and Adjustments 41m 17s
Selecting with the Elliptical Marquee tool 5m 57s
Working with the Rectangular Marquee tool 2m 16s
Using the Polygonal Lasso tool 2m 55s
Adding to or subtracting from your selection 5m 28s
Using the Magnetic Lasso tool 4m 19s
Working with the Quick Select tool 5m 51s
Removing the background with Quick Select 7m 37s
Using Color Range 6m 54s
13. Advanced Control with Masking 25m 41s
Introducing masks 4m 7s
Building and editing a mask 5m 35s
Removing a person from the background with masking 6m 6s
Removing color with a mask 4m 31s
Selectively sharpening an area of your photograph 5m 22s
14. Improving Exposure with Adjustment Layers 14m 7s
Automatically improving your images 3m 38s
Making custom levels adjustments 4m 20s
Fine-tuning an image with Curves 6m 9s
15. Adding, Changing, and Removing Color with Adjustment Layers 32m 41s
Changing color with Hue/Saturation 6m 12s
Increasing saturation and color variety with Vibrance 7m 13s
Using Color Balance to create vivid color 5m 9s
Making subtle color adjustments with Photo Filter 3m 15s
Creating a color effect with Curves 6m 36s
Converting to black and white 4m 16s
16. Applying Photographic Effects with Filters 19m 13s
Adding lens flare 2m 13s
Lighting your photographs with Lighting Effects 7m 0s
Changing focus with the Blur Gallery 7m 8s
Using Camera Raw as a filter to create a unique look 2m 52s
17. Sharpening and Reducing Noise 18m 40s
Reducing unwanted noise with Camera Raw and Photoshop 6m 44s
Sharpening and perfecting your photos with Smart Sharpen 6m 47s
Selectively sharpening an area of your photograph 5m 9s
18. Essential Image Retouching Techniques 42m 23s
Using Content-Aware Fill to remove distractions 4m 49s
Using repeated Content-Aware Fill commands to clean up an image 4m 9s
Working with the Patch tool and Content-Aware Move 4m 37s
Introducing the Clone Stamp tool 6m 52s
Removing skin blemishes with the Healing Brushes 6m 58s
Whitening teeth with an adjustment layer 5m 16s
Reducing wrinkles and shadows under the eyes 4m 50s
Changing shape with Liquify 4m 52s
19. Making Picture-Perfect Prints 12m 5s
Getting ready to print: Resize and sharpen 6m 11s
Selecting your printer and paper size 2m 32s
Choosing color management and printer settings 3m 22s

This installment of Photoshop CC for Photographers goes beyond the basics and focuses on the features and techniques that will dramatically improve your photographs and maximize your efficiency. Photographer and teacher Chris Orwig first illustrates the strengths of Bridge, the Adobe Photoshop companion program, as an organizational tool and a device for batch processing photographs. He then moves on to mastering Photoshop, starting with layers—targeting, moving, and merging them with greater speed and efficiency. Then learn how to make better selections, refine their edges, and paint in adjustments, as well as increase the color accuracy of your images with Levels and Curves. Plus, learn to work with blending modes, apply creative color effects, and use the Burn and Dodge tools to improve contrast—a classic photographic technique updated for the digital age. Chris also covers correcting perspective and distortion, creating photo composites and panoramas, and working with DSLR video in Photoshop.

$30

Content:

Introduction 2m 24s
Welcome 1m 35s
Using the exercise files 49s
1. Filtering and Finding Your Photos with Bridge 22m 4s
Optimizing your workflow with shortcuts 4m 14s
Rating, filtering, and finding the keepers more quickly 5m 52s
Using Full Screen mode to select the keepers 2m 34s
Minimizing the interface to better evaluate the images 3m 6s
Finding recently viewed folders and images 1m 35s
Viewing subfolders and searching for specific images 4m 43s
2. Organizing Your Photos with Bridge 23m 59s
Moving and renaming folders 1m 27s
Quickly renaming one or more images 3m 40s
Duplicate, Copy, and Move 3m 33s
Rejecting and deleting files 3m 19s
Grouping images into collections and smart collections 5m 27s
Using Review mode to create a collection of keepers 3m 47s
Stacking images into groups 2m 46s
3. Working Faster with Bridge 11m 36s
Resizing images quickly with Image Processor 4m 2s
Batch processing multiple files at once 4m 20s
Creating a contact sheet 3m 14s
4. Increasing Color Accuracy 13m 1s
The importance of using daylight-balanced lightbulbs 1m 20s
Correcting color casts using Camera Raw 3m 16s
Correcting color casts using Levels and Curves 3m 33s
Masking away color problems in specific areas 4m 52s
5. Becoming an Expert with Layers 36m 28s
Shortcuts for copying layers and layer style effects 6m 1s
Changing fill and opacity 2m 54s
Creating layer clipping masks 3m 37s
Using layers to create a two-image layout 7m 10s
Shortcuts for creating new layers 2m 22s
Increasing the size of the Layers panel 2m 18s
Selecting layers with more speed 3m 25s
An advanced way to select and reorder layers 3m 10s
Merging and flattening layers down 3m 44s
Merging all layers to the top 1m 47s
6. Making Better Selections and Masks 27m 17s
Working with the Quick Selection tool 6m 13s
Improving the edges of a mask and masking shortcuts 4m 55s
Refining mask edges with the Maximum filter 6m 23s
Using Color Range to build a mask 5m 38s
Copying masks from one layer to another 4m 8s
7. Creating Hand-Painted Masks 36m 0s
Working with Quick Select 7m 2s
Making gradient and hand-painted masks 6m 7s
Creating smoother transitions with a gradient mask 4m 26s
Making advanced tone corrections with hand-painted masks 7m 34s
Selective sharpening with a hand-painted mask 5m 55s
Removing small blemishes quickly 4m 56s
8. Discovering the Power of Blending Modes 38m 58s
Introducing the magic of blend modes 7m 31s
Using the Soft Light blending mode to increase visual impact 2m 39s
Using multiple blending modes for the best results 3m 6s
Improving underexposure 4m 27s
Stacking blending modes together 2m 58s
Create a saturated soft-glow effect 3m 17s
Using Smart Filters to add a film-grain effect 5m 31s
Using blending modes to remove white or black 4m 41s
Creating a sepia-toned look with the Color blending mode 2m 12s
Blending mode shortcuts 2m 36s
9. Color Creativity 42m 56s
Using the Replace Color adjustment 3m 55s
Adjusting color with Replace Color, Hue/Saturation, and masking 6m 16s
Becoming an expert with the Hue/Saturation controls 5m 15s
Removing targeted colors with Hue/Saturation 2m 50s
Making complicated color changes easy with Hue/Saturation 2m 47s
Introducing how to change color with Selective Color 4m 33s
Using Selective Color to enhance and change colors 9m 2s
Using Color Balance to create vivid color 4m 6s
Combining Color Balance and Curves to create dramatic color 4m 12s
10. Master the Art of Burning and Dodging 36m 30s
Introducing the Dodge and Burn tools 7m 41s
Improving a black-and-white landscape photograph 5m 1s
Brightening and darkening a color photograph 3m 42s
Dodging and reducing shadows in a portrait 8m 40s
Burning and dodging with the Brush 7m 48s
Burning and dodging with gradient tools 3m 38s
11. Creating an HDR Image 10m 24s
Selecting the files and launching HDR Pro 6m 15s
Finishing the image with Photoshop 4m 9s
12. Applying a Creative Look with HDR Toning 19m 1s
Creating an HDR effect with HDR Toning 5m 26s
Achieving a high-contrast, edgy portrait look 6m 8s
Creating a desaturated effect 7m 27s
13. Increased Flexibility with Smart Filters 8m 8s
Introducing Smart Filters 1m 33s
Applying Smart Filters 4m 10s
The advantages and disadvantages of using Smart Filters 2m 25s
14. Using Camera Raw as a Smart Filter 23m 49s
Enhancing your photographs using Camera Raw 3m 48s
Correcting exposure and color with Camera Raw 4m 50s
Fixing an overexposed sky with Camera Raw and masking 4m 51s
Masking in Camera Raw adjustments 4m 2s
Selective sharpening with Camera Raw and masks 6m 18s
15. Applying Creative Effects with the Blur Gallery 33m 38s
Changing focus with the Blur Gallery 5m 22s
Using Tilt-Shift Blur on a portrait 3m 38s
Becoming more advanced with Tilt-Shift Blur 7m 58s
Creating a specialized effect with Field Blur 5m 49s
Using channel masks to sharpen nonblurry areas of your photo 6m 8s
Changing the shape of the Iris Blur and using the Blur Effects panel 4m 43s
16. Making Perspective Corrections 42m 19s
Using the Lens Correction filter 5m 56s
Correcting difficult distortions with Lens Correction 6m 13s
Using Upright in Camera Raw to easily correct distortion 2m 47s
Digging deeper into the Camera Raw lens correction controls 4m 51s
Fixing difficult issues easily with Camera Raw 9m 6s
Correcting distortion in an architectural photograph 3m 37s
Using the Camera Raw lens correction controls for creative results 4m 21s
Using Puppet Warp to correct perspective 5m 28s
17. Combining Multiple Images Together 34m 38s
Combining the best expressions in two group photographs 6m 5s
Combining smaller elements from one frame to another 9m 34s
Combining two photos with movement 3m 6s
Using Photomerge to combine two images together 4m 11s
Creating a panoramic photo from multiple frames 2m 52s
Correcting distortion with the Adaptive Wide Angle filter 5m 11s
Cropping, filling in the gaps, and making final panoramic adjustments 3m 39s
18. Saving Your Photographs 12m 35s
Exploring when to save as TIFF, PSD, or JPEG 4m 15s
Preparing an image for the web 5m 12s
Saving an optimized JPEG for the web 3m 8s
19. Working with Your DSLR Video Files in Photoshop 37m 54s
Opening up a video file in Photoshop 6m 46s
Editing a video clip and adding type 6m 6s
Adding and modifying transitions 2m 40s
Using adjustment layers and adding an audio track 5m 54s
Creating a project with multiple clips 4m 28s
Adding cross-dissolves and fades, and creating custom shortcuts 5m 1s
Customizing the workspace to review your project 4m 12s
Exporting your project 2m 47s
Conclusion 1m 49s
Additional resources and newsletter 1m 49s

Learn how to use selections and layer masks in Photoshop to create composite images and apply targeted adjustments. After covering the key concepts behind selections and exploring Photoshop's selection tools, Tim Grey delves into a variety of advanced techniques that will help you make accurate selections, create seamless composite images, and apply adjustments that do exactly what you want them to do.

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 27s
Welcome 1m 27s
1. Basic Concepts 46m 26s
Selections, alpha channels, and layer masks, oh my! 5m 48s
Anti-aliasing and selections 6m 6s
The case for not feathering selections 6m 50s
Adding, subtracting, and intersecting 7m 31s
Inverting a selection 3m 4s
Mixing and matching selection tools 2m 32s
Using Deselect and Reselect 3m 47s
Temporarily hiding a selection 2m 7s
Saving and loading selections 6m 14s
Using the cursor for selections 2m 27s
2. Selection Tools 51m 42s
The Rectangular Marquee tool 8m 24s
The Elliptical Marquee tool 6m 2s
The Lasso tool 4m 55s
The Polygonal Lasso tool 6m 27s
The Magnetic Lasso tool 10m 9s
The Quick Selection tool 5m 33s
The Magic Wand tool 10m 12s
3. Advanced Selection Techniques 38m 38s
Selecting the border of an existing selection 1m 50s
The Color Range command 7m 19s
Focusing a Color Range selection 2m 55s
Selecting faces with Color Range 2m 31s
The Pen tool 5m 40s
Selecting by luminosity 3m 39s
Selecting from a channel 6m 13s
Transforming a selection 4m 4s
Quick Mask mode 4m 27s
4. Creating Composite Images 50m 46s
Combining layers into a single document 1m 49s
Layering images manually 1m 55s
Assembling a panorama automatically 3m 1s
Advanced blending 4m 0s
Painting to hide and reveal 3m 24s
Creating a selection-based composite 2m 43s
Select, then paint 3m 28s
Advanced mask cleanup 6m 18s
Creating an edge-fade effect 2m 23s
Using a filter to add an artistic edge 3m 6s
Using a brush effect to add an artistic edge 5m 30s
Transforming a masked object 1m 51s
Unlinking image and mask 2m 53s
Matching composite images 2m 17s
Adding layer effects with masks 2m 21s
Reviewing layer masks 3m 47s
5. Applying Targeted Adjustments 28m 58s
Painting in an adjustment 3m 20s
Shades of gray 3m 14s
Using the Gradient tool 4m 4s
Adjusting a selected area 1m 42s
Creating a vignette effect with masking 2m 13s
Using a layer group 3m 34s
Working with multiple masks 4m 5s
Refining an adjustment mask 6m 46s

Learning how to use Adobe Photoshop efficiently and effectively is the best way to get the most out of your pixels and create stunning imagery. Master the fundamentals of this program with Julieanne Kost, and discover how to achieve the results you want with Photoshop and its companion programs, Bridge and Camera Raw. This comprehensive course covers nondestructive editing techniques using layers, masking, adjustment layers, blend modes, and Smart Objects. Find out how to perform common editing tasks, including lens correction, cropping and straightening, color and tonal adjustments, noise reduction, shadow and highlight detail recovery, sharpening, and retouching. Julieanne also shows how to achieve more creative effects with filters, layer effects, illustrative type, and the Photomerge command for creating panoramas and composites.

$30

Content:

Adobe Photoshop 1m 42s
What is Photoshop? 1m 42s
Introduction 2m 10s
Welcome 1m 4s
Using the exercise files 25s
Installing Adobe Bridge 41s
1. It Begins in Bridge 40m 58s
What is Adobe Bridge? 3m 3s
Getting photos from a camera 6m 0s
A tour of workspaces in Bridge 8m 30s
Customizing how thumbnails are displayed 4m 42s
Changing file names and batch renaming 4m 39s
Adding basic metadata with metadata templates 4m 46s
Creating and applying keywords to images 7m 1s
Viewing images in Full Screen Preview mode 2m 17s
2. Whittling Down to Keepers 27m 23s
Using Review mode to filter out rejected images 5m 32s
Saving images in collections 3m 52s
Rating and labeling images 4m 31s
Using the Filter panel to view different subsets 3m 7s
Using smart collections 3m 39s
Viewing final selects in a slideshow 2m 50s
Organizing groups of images into stacks 3m 52s
3. Camera Raw Essentials 32m 34s
Comparing raw and JPEG files 5m 5s
Starting in Camera Raw instead of Photoshop 4m 1s
Touring the Camera Raw user interface 5m 29s
Previewing before and after adjustments 3m 18s
Toggling onscreen Shadow/Highlight clipping warnings 4m 44s
Choosing output settings 4m 49s
Saving a copy without going to Photoshop 5m 8s
4. Fixing Common Problems Quickly with Camera Raw 57m 59s
Using the nondestructive Crop tool 4m 38s
Correcting a tilted horizon line with the Straighten tool 4m 12s
Fixing color casts with the White Balance tool 3m 52s
Fixing blown-out highlights 6m 38s
Revealing hidden shadow detail 4m 36s
Reducing distracting color noise with Noise Reduction 5m 55s
Correcting lens distortion 5m 17s
Making perspective corrections to images 5m 51s
Removing chromatic aberration 3m 32s
Sharpening details 7m 23s
Making an average photo great 6m 5s
5. Retouching and Using Creative Techniques with Camera Raw 1h 3m
Using the Graduated Filter tool 5m 39s
Adding a radial gradient 6m 35s
Making local adjustments with the Adjustment Brush 11m 19s
Retouching blemishes with the Spot Removal tool 4m 35s
A quick portrait retouching technique using Clarity 7m 49s
Converting to black and white 3m 17s
Editing images directly with the Targeted Adjustment tool 3m 56s
Selective coloring effects with the Adjustment Brush 5m 56s
Easy sepia and split-tone effects 4m 11s
Adding digital film grain texture effects 2m 27s
Adding vignettes and border effects 4m 24s
Saving variations within a single file with the Snapshot command 3m 27s
6. Automating Camera Raw 19m 49s
Copying and pasting settings across files 1m 52s
Processing multiple files in Camera Raw 4m 22s
Saving and using a library of Camera Raw presets 5m 47s
Saving multiple files in Camera Raw 4m 9s
Using Image Processor to batch process multiple files 3m 39s
7. Photoshop Interface Essentials 35m 30s
Opening files from Bridge 3m 9s
Opening files from Mini Bridge 4m 40s
Customizing the Mini Bridge panel 5m 11s
Customizing the interface in Photoshop 3m 49s
Managing panels 5m 1s
Switching and saving workspaces 3m 45s
Switching tools using the keyboard 3m 21s
Customizing the keyboard shortcuts 6m 34s
8. Documents and Navigation 22m 49s
Working with tabbed documents 2m 51s
Arranging documents 3m 37s
Stopping Photoshop from tabbing documents 2m 49s
Panning, zooming, and using the Rotate View tool 9m 51s
Cycling through the different screen modes 3m 41s
9. Digital Image Essentials 26m 19s
Understanding file formats 8m 26s
Choosing the resolution you need 5m 15s
Understanding Resize vs. Resample 9m 40s
How big a print can you make with your image? 2m 58s
10. Cropping and Transformations 59m 15s
Using Undo and the History panel 6m 40s
Using crop options 4m 20s
Understanding Hide vs. Delete for the Crop tool 3m 52s
Cropping to the perfect print size 3m 51s
Making the canvas bigger with the Crop tool 5m 2s
Making the canvas bigger using the Canvas Size command 4m 57s
Straightening a crooked image 4m 21s
Removing keystoning from buildings 2m 6s
Using the Perspective Crop tool 2m 4s
Scaling, skewing, and rotating with Free Transform 8m 29s
Nondestructive transformations with Smart Objects 3m 56s
Warping images 4m 48s
Preserving important elements with Content-Aware Scale 4m 49s
11. Working with Layers 43m 18s
Exploring layer basics 13m 25s
Loading, selecting, and transforming layers 10m 51s
Organizing layers into layer groups 8m 47s
Merging, rasterizing, and flattening layers 10m 15s
12. Selections and Layer Masks 1h 7m
Using the Marquee and Lasso tools 11m 41s
Combining selections 6m 40s
Converting a selection into a layer mask 7m 40s
Using the Quick Selection tool and Refine Edge 7m 12s
Selecting soft-edged objects using Refine Edge 9m 28s
Touching up a layer mask with the Brush tool 5m 42s
Changing the opacity, size, and hardness of the painting tools 9m 9s
Blending images with a gradient layer mask 4m 55s
Combining multiple exposures with layer masks 5m 5s
13. Tone and Color Correction with Adjustment Layers 42m 5s
Introducing adjustment layers 3m 29s
Starting with a preset 2m 36s
Improving tonal quality with Levels 7m 32s
Increasing midtone contrast with Curves 5m 7s
Removing a color cast with Auto Color 2m 37s
Changing the color temperature with Photo Filter 1m 56s
Shifting colors with Hue/Saturation 5m 39s
Making washed-out colors pop with Vibrance 2m 7s
Converting color to black and white 3m 32s
Creating traditional darkroom toning effects 2m 51s
Controlling which layers are affected by an adjustment layer 3m 49s
Three different ways to add an adjustment layer 50s
14. Additional Options for Tone and Color Correction 24m 41s
Adjusting shadows and highlights 5m 49s
Replacing color using Selective Color 5m 39s
Using fill layers to create a hand-painted look 7m 18s
Using a gradient fill layer to add a color wash 5m 55s
15. Retouching Essentials 38m 11s
Removing blemishes with the Healing Brush and Patch tools 10m 21s
A quick technique for smoothing skin and pores 3m 4s
Making teeth bright and white 2m 47s
Brightening eyes, to make a person appear more alert 6m 31s
Taming flyaway hair 4m 53s
De-emphasizing wrinkles with the Healing Brush 1m 53s
Body sculpting with Liquify 5m 13s
Removing unwanted details with Content-Aware Fill 3m 29s
16. Combining Multiple Images 22m 47s
Creating panoramas with Photomerge and Auto-Blend 5m 50s
Combining multiple frames of an action sequence 6m 21s
Swapping heads in a family portrait 4m 3s
Working with bracketed exposures (HDR) 6m 33s
17. Essential Filters 57m 22s
Overview of filters 3m 3s
Applying filters nondestructively with Smart Filters 5m 56s
Straightening images using the Adaptive Wide Angle filter 5m 28s
Creating a soft glow with the Gaussian Blur filter 3m 23s
Creating an infrared look with Diffuse Glow 5m 4s
Adding noise with the Add Noise filter 7m 7s
Sharpening an image with Unsharp Mask and Smart Sharpen 7m 22s
Giving an image texture with the Texturizer filter 1m 53s
Using the Field, Iris, and Tilt-Shift Blurs 8m 32s
Creating a painting with the Oil Paint filter 2m 35s
Applying the Camera Raw filter 2m 48s
Applying a filter to multiple layers 4m 11s
18. Essential Blend Modes 24m 3s
Cycling through the blending modes 5m 24s
Scanning or photographing paper to add a deckled edge 4m 55s
Adding texture with blend modes 1m 58s
Making a cast shadow more realistic with Multiply 5m 57s
Sharpening an image with High Pass and Overlay 2m 49s
Adding a realistic off-center vignette 3m 0s
19. Type Essentials 34m 43s
Exploring character (point) type 11m 4s
Adding paragraph (area) type 4m 7s
Adding type on a path 7m 3s
Clipping an image inside type 3m 41s
Warping type 2m 36s
Defining character and paragraph styles 6m 12s
20. Basic Shape Layers 24m 13s
Using the shape tools 13m 45s
Custom shape layers 6m 15s
Adding a keyline to an image 4m 13s
21. Essential Layer Effects and Styles 24m 48s
Adding a drop shadow effect 8m 57s
Adding edges, textures, and color overlays using styles 5m 11s
Creating a transparent logo or watermark 4m 46s
Knowing how and when to scale layer effects 5m 54s
22. Sharing Images 11m 43s
Creating contact sheets 4m 29s
Creating PDF presentations 3m 25s
Saving for the web 3m 49s
23. Video 23m 9s
Working with video clips 12m 14s
Adding special effects to video files 5m 56s
Adding pans and zooms to still images 4m 59s
Conclusion 1m 4s
Next steps 1m 4s

This course provides extensive guidance on cleaning up blemishes and distractions in photos using Adobe Photoshop CC. It begins with a basic overview of the key concepts and a review of the relevant tools available in Photoshop, then covers basic and advanced cleanup techniques. Gain confidence in your ability to remove even the most challenging blemishes in your photos.

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 17s
Welcome 1m 17s
1. Cleanup Concepts 27m 8s
The ethics of cleanup 2m 44s
Reviewing the image 4m 11s
Adjusting for review 4m 43s
Nondestructive cleanup 4m 33s
Brush hardness considerations 5m 44s
The case against Smart Objects 2m 48s
Checking your work 2m 25s
2. Essential Cleanup Tools 41m 17s
Crop tool cleanup 4m 54s
The Clone Stamp tool 9m 26s
The Healing Brush tool 7m 4s
The Spot Healing Brush tool 3m 43s
The Patch tool 5m 38s
Content-Aware Fill 4m 5s
The Content-Aware Move tool 6m 27s
3. Cleanup Techniques 1h 11m
Reducing noise 8m 37s
Fixing chromatic aberration 6m 42s
Straightening a crooked image 5m 14s
Basic lens corrections 4m 31s
Correcting perspective 6m 15s
Shake reduction 8m 9s
Basic spotting 3m 28s
Properly aligning corrections 5m 4s
Correcting color contamination 4m 15s
Brightening and whitening 7m 46s
Red-eye removal 4m 27s
Mixing and matching cleanup tools 3m 12s
Toning down rather than removing 3m 49s
4. Advanced Cleanup Techniques 37m 24s
Removing strong color casts 4m 34s
Adjusting brush shape 4m 38s
Gradient adjustments 4m 8s
Pen tool cleanup 4m 53s
Manual patching 5m 7s
Extending the frame 4m 21s
Using multiple exposures to remove people 4m 55s
Replacing a bad sky 4m 48s

To truly make the most of a raw capture, you need to use the best possible methods to convert that image. Adobe Camera Raw, included as part of Photoshop, provides you with a wide variety of tools to help you produce optimal raw conversions. This course will guide you through all of the available options and the best techniques to make sure the converted image is of the highest possible quality.

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 10s
Welcome 1m 10s
1. Adobe Camera Raw Overview 51m 39s
Opening raw captures 3m 47s
Setting Camera Raw preferences 7m 1s
Checking for updates 2m 26s
Zooming and panning 4m 21s
Histogram evaluation 4m 34s
Evaluating with previews 2m 43s
Presets 3m 49s
Snapshots 4m 8s
Workflow options 7m 1s
Cancel, Save, Done, or Open 4m 54s
Resetting adjustments 2m 42s
Processing multiple images 4m 13s
2. Basic Adjustments 39m 41s
Image rotation 2m 36s
Cropping and straightening 3m 17s
White balance adjustments 5m 28s
Basic tonal adjustments 5m 51s
Presence adjustments 4m 24s
Tone curve adjustments 5m 30s
Image sharpening 7m 42s
Noise reduction 4m 53s
3. Advanced Adjustments 39m 23s
HSL adjustments 3m 0s
Grayscale conversion 3m 49s
Split toning 4m 11s
Profile-based lens corrections 3m 58s
Correcting color fringing 4m 16s
Correcting perspective 5m 23s
Compensating for lens vignetting 2m 49s
Adding a film grain effect 2m 26s
Creative vignetting 5m 11s
Camera calibration 4m 20s
4. Focused Adjustments 28m 10s
Targeted adjustments 3m 57s
Spot removal 5m 35s
Red-eye removal 3m 25s
The Graduated filter 4m 36s
The Radial filter 3m 31s
The Adjustment Brush 7m 6s

Photographers often find it challenging to make color adjustments, and this course will clear up the confusion and help you optimize color with confidence. It starts with an overview of general color issues and settings in Photoshop, explores the various adjustment options that relate to color in photos, and covers advanced techniques for fine-tuning color or adding a creative touch.

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 13s
Welcome 1m 13s
1. Configuration Considerations 17m 7s
Color space and bit depth 10m 3s
Color settings for raw conversion 3m 11s
The importance of calibration 3m 53s
2. Understanding and Evaluating Color 38m 44s
An intro to RGB 5m 9s
Color models and the color picker 6m 49s
Wild swings of color balance 3m 26s
Evaluating with a saturation boost 4m 32s
Using the Info panel 5m 11s
Reading a histogram 8m 14s
Reviewing color channels 5m 23s
3. Foundations of Color Adjustment 43m 5s
Basic color for raw 5m 1s
Automatic color with Levels or Curves 5m 47s
Essentials of Color Balance 8m 18s
Darkening for color 2m 44s
Vibrance vs. Saturation 5m 23s
Correcting with a hint of tint 4m 51s
Achieving a neutral gray 6m 41s
Removing strong color casts 4m 20s
4. Focused Color Corrections 58m 33s
Balancing a specific color 7m 7s
Eliminating a problem color 4m 37s
Recovering color detail 3m 45s
Neutralizing highlights and shadows 3m 54s
Sophisticated color with Curves 4m 34s
Adding a gradient of color 4m 50s
Whitening and brightening 6m 15s
Painting a color fix 3m 30s
Removing color from a lens flare 2m 13s
Using an adjustment layer to paint in a correction 4m 33s
Toning down color in skin 4m 40s
Selection-based targeted color correction 3m 44s
Warming up shadows 4m 51s

This course guides photographers through all of the key adjustments they're likely to use in the process of making their photos look their best using Photoshop. The course begins with an overview of some of the concepts related to applying adjustments, and then moves through basic, advanced, and creative adjustments.

$30

Content:

Welcome 1m 3s
1. Getting Started 39m 17s
Configuring the Photoshop interface 5m 43s
Opening an existing image 3m 46s
Basic raw conversion 4m 5s
Introduction to adjustment layers 3m 38s
Image evaluation 6m 0s
A basic adjustment workflow 4m 7s
Reviewing, refining, and resetting adjustments 4m 52s
Saving the master image 7m 6s
2. Basic Adjustments 47m 7s
Cropping the image 7m 57s
Improving tonality with Brightness/Contrast 4m 42s
Refining tonality with Levels 7m 23s
Correcting color with Color Balance 8m 24s
Boosting colors with Vibrance 5m 58s
Refining colors with Hue/Saturation 8m 51s
Adding a tint with Photo Filter 3m 52s
3. Advanced Adjustments 54m 7s
Incorporating Camera Raw 2m 2s
Basic perspective correction 7m 49s
Using the Shadows/Highlights adjustment 7m 15s
Dodging and burning 8m 21s
Introduction to Curves 5m 6s
Tonal adjustments with Curves 6m 53s
Color adjustments with Curves 4m 22s
Basic targeted adjustments 7m 41s
Making a targeted adjustment from a selection 4m 38s
4. Creative Adjustments 42m 31s
Creating black and white from color 4m 41s
Adding a tint to a black-and-white image 3m 14s
Using a gradient map 9m 3s
Adding a vignette effect 3m 51s
Creating film grain 3m 23s
Adding an HDR toning effect 6m 24s
Getting creative with Curves 3m 19s
Using filter effects 3m 43s
Using the Oil Paint filter 4m 53s

Topics include:
Performing image-correction triage
Cloning to an empty layer
Using adjustment layers and blend modes
Opening a raw file as a Smart Object
Making selective adjustments
Recovering the detail in skies
Using graduated adjustments
Fixing exposure
Saving time with Auto Tone and Auto Contrast
Adjusting hue and saturation
Limiting adjustments
Adjusting shadows and highlights
Converting an image to black and white

$30

Content:

Introduction
2m 23s
1. How to Approach Color Correction in Photoshop
22m 33s
2. Nondestructive Workflows in Photoshop
12m 4s
3. Working with Raw Files Nondestructively
34m 2s
4. Performing Primary Image Adjustments
23m 15s
5. Controlling Adjustment Layers
10m 7s
6. Using the Shadows/Highlights Command
9m 39s
7. Special-Case Adjustments
24m 15s
8. The Black-and-White Adjustments
17m 56s
Conclusion
48s

 

Photoshop CS6 One-on-One: Fundamentals is a concise and focused introduction to the key features in Photoshop, presented by long-time lynda.com author and Adobe veteran Deke McClelland. This course covers the image editing process from the very beginning and progresses through the concepts and techniques that every photographer or graphic designer should know. Deke explains digital imaging fundamentals, such as resolution vs. size and the effects of downsampling. He explains how to use layers to edit an image nondestructively and organize those edits in an easy-to-read way, and introduces techniques such as cropping, adjusting brightness and contrast, correcting and changing color, and retouching and healing images. These lessons distill the vast assortment of tools and options to a refined set of skills that will get you working inside Photoshop with confidence.
Topics include:
* Opening an image from Photoshop, Bridge, or Camera Raw
* Navigating, zooming, panning, and rotating the canvas
* Adding, deleting, and merging layers
* Saving your progress and understanding file formats
* Cropping and straightening
* Adjusting brightness and contrast
* Identifying and correcting a color cast
* Making and editing selections
* Enhancing portraits by retouching skin, teeth, and eyes

$30

Content:

1. Opening an Image 19m 15s
Welcome to One-on-One 02m 27s
Opening an image from the Windows desktop 04m 07s
Opening an image from the Macintosh Finder 04m 09s
Opening an image from Photoshop or Bridge 02m 45s
Opening an image from Mini Bridge 01m 16s
Opening an image through Camera Raw 02m 32s
Closing one image and using Close All 01m 59s
2. Getting Around 38m 14s
Navigating your image 00m 40s
The dark vs. the light interface 03m 12s
Navigating tabs and windows 04m 32s
Organizing panels and workspaces 04m 27s
Zooming incrementally 04m 29s
Zooming continuously 02m 43s
Entering a custom zoom value 02m 25s
Scrolling and panning images 02m 31s
Rotating and resetting the view 02m 11s
Cycling between screen modes 03m 10s
Using the Navigator panel 03m 38s
Adjusting a few screen preferences 04m 16s
3. Image Size and Resolution 45m 58s
Understanding digital imaging fundamentals 01m 45s
Working with image size and resolution 03m 03s
Using the Image Size command 03m 27s
Exploring common resolution standards 03m 20s
Upsampling vs. capturing real pixels 04m 36s
Changing the print size 06m 16s
Downsampling for print 04m 12s
Downsampling for email 03m 11s
Exploring the interpolation settings 05m 22s
Some downsampling advice 04m 36s
Some upsampling advice 06m 10s
4. Using Layers 53m 17s
Introducing the layered composition 01m 40s
Introducing the Layers panel 04m 12s
Adding, scaling, and aligning layers 05m 27s
Dragging and dropping layers 04m 36s
Stacking, revealing, and renaming 02m 58s
Working with opacity, the History command, and blend modes 06m 05s
Duplicating a selected portion of a layer 05m 32s
Applying a clipping mask 03m 58s
Blending inside a clipping mask 04m 10s
Finishing off your artwork 03m 13s
Creating a new layer and background 04m 24s
Layering tips and tricks 07m 02s
5. Saving Your Progress 26m 19s
The art of the save 00m 54s
Four things to know about saving 06m 00s
Saving layers to PSD 06m 38s
Saving print images to TIFF 04m 48s
Saving an interactive image to PNG 03m 41s
Saving a flat photo to JPEG 04m 18s
6. Crop and Straighten 19m 36s
Honing in on your image 01m 43s
Exploring the new and improved Crop tool 03m 35s
Editing your last crop 03m 01s
Straightening a crooked image 02m 29s
Filling in missing details 06m 44s
Using the Perspective Crop tool 02m 04s
7. Adjusting Luminance 42m 06s
First, there is brightness 02m 12s
Understanding how luminance works 04m 18s
Using the three Auto commands 03m 27s
Working with automatic brightness and contrast 03m 19s
Using the Brightness/Contrast command 02m 47s
Using a dynamic adjustment layer 04m 05s
Editing adjustment layers 03m 52s
Isolating an adjustment with a layer mask 03m 31s
Introducing the histogram 04m 58s
Measuring an adjustment 03m 34s
Using the Shadows/Highlights command 06m 03s
8. Adjusting Colors 44m 33s
And second, there is color 01m 31s
Identifying a color cast 03m 34s
Correcting a color cast automatically 03m 57s
Changing the color balance 06m 10s
Compensating with Photo Filter 03m 11s
Adjusting color intensity with Vibrance 03m 29s
Correcting color casts in Camera Raw 05m 46s
Using the Hue/Saturation command 05m 26s
Summoning colors where none exist 04m 08s
Making more color with Vibrance 04m 27s
Making a quick-and-dirty sepia tone 02m 54s
9. Select and Edit 55m 53s
Making selective edits 01m 10s
Using the geometric marquee tools 06m 01s
Aligning one image element to another 05m 05s
Working with the Lasso tool 03m 59s
Using the Polygonal Lasso tool and Quick Mask mode 05m 19s
Cropping one selection inside another 06m 16s
Creating rays of light 04m 44s
Using the Quick Selection tool and the Similar command 04m 11s
Making it better with Refine Edge 04m 56s
Integrating image elements 02m 39s
Using the Magic Wand tool and the Grow command 05m 17s
Refining and finishing the image 06m 16s
10. Retouch and Heal 53m 49s
Putting your best face forward 01m 00s
Working with Content-Aware Fill 06m 11s
Using the Spot Healing Brush 05m 36s
Working with the more capable standard Healing Brush 05m 55s
Meet the Clone Source panel 03m 53s
Using Caps Lock and fading brushstrokes 04m 57s
Using the Dodge and Burn tools 05m 01s
Adjusting color with the Brush tool 06m 35s
Smoothing skin textures 05m 58s
Brightening teeth 04m 00s
Intensifying eyes 04m 43s
Conclusion 00m 51s
Goodbye 00m 51s

In this course, industry pro Deke McClelland teaches you how to build on your basic knowledge and achieve next-level effects in the premiere image-editing program from Adobe, Photoshop CS6. Discover how to seamlessly move and patch areas of a photo with the Content-Aware toolset; stretch the brightness of a scene with automatic and custom Levels adjustments; create intricate designs with text and shapes; and morph an image with layer effects and transformations. Deke also shares his techniques for sharpening details, whether addressing noise and highlight/shadow clipping or camera shake, and converting a full-color image to black-and-white. The final chapters show you how to best print and save images for the web, making sure all your hard work pays off in the final output.
Topics include:
* Performing automatic retouch, scaling, and more with the Content-Aware tools
* Editing the histogram
* Customizing a Levels adjustment
* Making channel-by-channel Levels adjustments
* Sharpening with the Smart Sharpen, Emboss, and High Pass filters
* Working with vector-based type
* Kerning and tracking characters
* Creating text on a path
* Drawing and customizing shapes
* Creating depth, contour, and texture with layer effects
* Liquifying an image
* Simulating an infrared photo
* Adjusting print position, size, and color
* Creating the perfect JPEG image
* Downsampling for the web

$30

Content:

11. Content-Aware Features 29m 4s
The best of Photoshop automation 1m 57s
Introducing the Patch tool 3m 43s
Using Content-Aware Patch 5m 42s
Retouching with Content-Aware Patch 2m 5s
Using the Content-Aware Move tool 3m 9s
Using Content-Aware Extend 2m 4s
The Content-Aware Scale command 4m 32s
Scaling in multiple passes 2m 21s
Protecting skin tones 3m 31s
12. Adjusting Levels 33m 4s
Editing the histogram 1m 50s
The new automatic Levels adjustment 4m 43s
Customizing a Levels adjustment 4m 53s
Understanding the Gamma value 2m 7s
Opening up the shadows 2m 48s
Previewing clipped pixels 3m 40s
Retouching with Output Levels 4m 24s
Making channel-by-channel adjustments 2m 19s
Faking a gray card in post 2m 51s
Assigning shortcuts to adjustment layers 3m 29s
13. Sharpening Details 40m 37s
How sharpening works 1m 38s
Introducing the Smart Sharpen filter 4m 30s
Understanding the Radius value 2m 57s
Gauging the best sharpening settings 4m 4s
Addressing color artifacts and clipping 4m 4s
Sharpening a digital photograph 3m 41s
The More Accurate check box 4m 44s
Correcting for camera shake 3m 25s
Sharpening with the Emboss filter 3m 49s
Sharpening with High Pass 4m 44s
Painting in sharpness 3m 1s
14. Working with Text 1h 11m
Vector-based type 1m 35s
Creating and editing point text 5m 58s
Font and type style tricks 7m 10s
Type size and color tricks 7m 29s
Kerning and tracking characters 8m 7s
Creating and editing area text 3m 50s
Selecting and formatting paragraphs 6m 36s
Setting text inside a custom path 5m 32s
Creating text along a path 6m 12s
Adjusting baseline shift 5m 40s
Creating and stylizing a logo 6m 49s
Masking text into image elements 6m 14s
15. Drawing Shapes 51m 32s
The other vector-based layer 1m 40s
Drawing a dashed or dotted border 6m 33s
Drawing and aligning custom shapes 3m 55s
Creating your own repeatable custom shape 5m 43s
Combining simple shapes to make complex ones 5m 59s
Cropping, adjusting, and merging shapes 5m 50s
Creating a soft, synthetic sparkle 6m 22s
Saving a resolution-independent PDF file 6m 42s
Turning a small image into a huge one 8m 48s
16. Layer Effects 1h 14m
Depth, contour, and texture 1m 28s
Imparting depth with a layer effect 9m 9s
The power of the drop shadow 7m 37s
Modifying a layer and its effects 6m 21s
Saving custom default settings 4m 44s
Creating a custom contour 8m 5s
Introducing Bevel and Emboss 8m 8s
Multiple effects and multiple layers 7m 46s
Global Light and rasterizing effects 8m 6s
Gloss and surface contour 6m 4s
Adding texture to Bevel and Emboss 7m 21s
17. Paragraph, Character, and Layer Styles 34m 48s
Styles store settings 1m 38s
Creating and applying a paragraph style 3m 41s
Redefining a style and styling a word 5m 38s
Creating and styling a placeholder style 5m 43s
Applying and creating layer styles 5m 45s
Loading and customizing layer styles 5m 42s
Merging and saving layer styles 6m 41s
18. Scale, Rotate, Skew, and Warp 56m 52s
Meet the transformations 1m 55s
Transformation and Smart Objects 5m 50s
Adjusting the interpolation setting 5m 10s
Rotating a layer with Free Transform 5m 22s
Scale, duplicate, and repeat 4m 30s
Creating a synthetic star field 5m 20s
Warping a logo with Arc and Flag 5m 34s
Distort, perspective, and skew 4m 15s
Using transformations to draw and correct 7m 0s
Bolstering text with layer effects 5m 43s
Adding highlights with Lens Flare 6m 13s
19. Liquifying an Image 41m 14s
Removing the weight that the camera adds 1m 7s
The Warp and Reconstruct tools 6m 36s
Brush size, hardness, and opacity 3m 1s
The Pucker, Bloat, Push, and Twirl tools 7m 7s
Saving and reapplying Liquify settings 3m 40s
Lifting and slimming details 9m 31s
Warping legs, arms, and fabric 5m 32s
Improving a model's posture 4m 40s
20. Black-and-White Photography 58m 45s
Shoot in color, convert to black and white 1m 55s
Three ways to grayscale 5m 36s
Mixing a custom black-and-white image 7m 31s
Simulating an infrared photograph 6m 39s
Creating a sienna-infused sepia tone 5m 38s
Creating a hyper-saturated image 5m 26s
Introducing the Black & White command 3m 16s
Customizing the Black & White settings 4m 49s
Black & White meets the Channel Mixer 7m 29s
Infusing an image with tint and color 5m 9s
Camera Raw: Grayscale and Split Tone 5m 17s
21. Printing an Image 41m 37s
The many ways to print 1m 41s
Using the test document 3m 18s
Print, position, and size 6m 0s
Description and printing marks 3m 3s
Establishing a bleed 3m 44s
Getting reliable color 5m 54s
Special printing options 5m 1s
Previewing an image at print size 4m 16s
Creating contact sheets 4m 49s
Creating a multipage PDF 3m 51s
22. Saving for the Web 30m 48s
Making Internet imagery 1m 10s
Introducing Save for Web 4m 54s
Creating the perfect JPEG image 5m 14s
Creating a high-contrast GIF image 6m 23s
The two varieties of PNG 3m 57s
Downsampling for the web 5m 19s
Adding copyright and contact info 3m 51s
Conclusion 1m 0s
Until next time 1m 0s

The third part of the popular and comprehensive series Photoshop CS6 One-on-One follows industry pro Deke McClelland as he plunges into the inner workings of Adobe Photoshop. He shows how to adjust your color, interface, and performance settings to get the best out of your images and the most out of Photoshop, and explores the power of Smart Objects, Shadows/Highlights, and Curves for making subtle, nondestructive adjustments. The course dives into Camera Raw to experiment with the editing toolset there, and returns to Photoshop to discuss toning, blur, and blend modes. Deke also teaches tried-and-true methods for sharpening details and reducing noise, as well as creating quick and accurate selections with Quick Mask, Color Range, and Refine Edge commands.
Topics include:

Adjusting the color settings in Photoshop
Placing and blending Smart Objects in a scene
Transforming and warping vector objects
Correcting for lens distortion
Mitigating halos and enhancing contrast with Shadows/Highlights
Adding and editing points on a curve
Editing multiple images in Camera Raw
Creating a pro-quality sepia tone or quadtone
Colorizing with blend modes and opacity
Reducing and smoothing over noise
Creating depth-of-field effects with blur
Selecting with Color Range and Quick Mask
Perfecting a mask with Refine Edge
Drawing paths with the Pen tool
Converting path outlines to vector masks

$30

Content

23. Shortcuts and Settings 30m 4s
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 19s
Loading the dekeKeys keyboard shortcuts 6m 5s
Remapping your Macintosh OS shortcuts 3m 4s
Adjusting a few general preferences 4m 3s
Using the visual HUD color picker 2m 2s
The interface and performance settings 5m 31s
Adjusting the color settings in Photoshop 7m 0s
24. Smart Objects 47m 0s
Smart Objects 1m 36s
Three ways to place a Smart Object 3m 6s
Copying and pasting from Adobe Illustrator 4m 11s
Transforming and warping a vector object 4m 48s
Blending a Smart Object into a photograph 3m 10s
Blurring with a nested Smart Filter 4m 57s
Editing a Smart Object in Illustrator 3m 20s
Creating "true clones" 3m 50s
Duplicating a group of clones 2m 53s
Breaking the Smart Object link 2m 53s
Styling and blending Smart Objects 2m 44s
Editing originals; updating clones 3m 41s
Removing people from a scene with Median 5m 51s
25. Shadows/Highlights 29m 59s
Luminance meets sharpening 1m 2s
Correcting for lens distortion 4m 39s
Introducing Shadows/Highlights 3m 54s
Mitigating halos with Radius values 4m 19s
Enhancing the effects of Midtone Contrast 3m 18s
Creating a "bounce" with Gaussian Blur 3m 29s
Sharpening on top of blur 2m 47s
Masking a group of Smart Filters 2m 53s
Reducing the density of a layer mask 3m 38s
26. Using Curves 49m 10s
Using Curves 2m 40s
Introducing the Curves adjustment 7m 36s
Adding and editing points on a curve 6m 27s
Winning Curves tips and tricks 8m 12s
Correcting a challenging image 6m 33s
Selecting and darkening highlights 4m 39s
Neutralizing colors and smoothing transitions 6m 6s
The new automatic Curves function 6m 57s
27. Camera Raw 1h 31m
Camera Raw 2m 11s
Opening and editing multiple images 8m 1s
Correcting white balance 4m 8s
The revamped Exposure controls 8m 8s
Working with archival images 7m 54s
The Spot Removal and Graduated Filter tools 6m 4s
Painting edits with the Adjustment Brush 7m 23s
Tone Curves (and why you don't need them) 5m 57s
Straighten, crop, and geometric distortions 5m 17s
Applying manual lens corrections 5m 14s
Vignette, chromatic aberration, and fringe 6m 49s
Selective hue, saturation, and luminance 6m 36s
Working with JPEG and TIFF images 6m 36s
Camera Raw Smart Objects 6m 48s
Editing Camera Raw images from Bridge 4m 24s
28. Duotones and Colorize 32m 30s
Duotones 1m 23s
Creating a professional-quality sepia tone 4m 18s
Introducing the Gradient Map adjustment 5m 42s
Loading a library of custom gradients 3m 48s
Creating a custom quadtone 5m 48s
Colorizing with blend modes and Opacity 4m 6s
Creating a faux-color, high-key effect 7m 25s
29. Noise and Detail 1h 6m
Noise vs. Details 1m 28s
Introducing the Reduce Noise filter 7m 29s
Correcting a noisy photo 5m 33s
Smoothing over high-contrast noise 5m 50s
Protecting details with an edge mask 4m 52s
Adjusting overly saturated shadows 3m 35s
Correcting with High Pass and Lens Blur 3m 45s
Brushing away blur and sharpening 6m 42s
Creating texture by adding noise 5m 28s
The Camera Raw Detail panel 7m 8s
Correcting noise and detail in Camera Raw 8m 10s
Adding noise grain and vignetting effects 6m 47s
30. The Blur Gallery 44m 30s
Blur Gallery 1m 36s
Creating depth-of-field effects in post 5m 29s
Modifying your Field Blur settings 4m 57s
Editing and exporting a Field Blur mask 6m 15s
Adding a synthetic light bokeh 3m 52s
Using the Selection Bleed option 7m 29s
Creating a radial blur with Iris Blur 6m 59s
Creating "fake miniatures" with Tilt-Shift 4m 35s
Combining multiple Blur Gallery effects 3m 18s
31. Blend Modes 1h 34m
Blend Modes 1m 16s
Using the Dissolve mode 9m 47s
Multiply and the darken modes 8m 30s
Screen and the lighten modes 8m 10s
Cleaning up and integrating a bad photo 6m 38s
Blending inside blend modes 6m 55s
Overlay and the contrast modes 6m 53s
A few great uses for the contrast modes 9m 7s
Difference, Exclusion, Subtract, and Divide 5m 5s
Capturing the differences between images 4m 18s
Hue, Saturation, Color, and Luminosity 4m 45s
Blend mode shortcuts 6m 21s
The Fill Opacity Eight 8m 57s
Using the luminance-exclusion slider bars 8m 8s
32. Color Range and Quick Mask 44m 20s
Color Range 1m 14s
Introducing the Color Range command 7m 24s
Selecting a complex image with Color Range 5m 49s
Refining a selection in the Quick Mask mode 7m 4s
Viewing a mask with or without its image 4m 24s
Painting directly inside an alpha channel 5m 39s
Correcting fringes around a masked layer 8m 5s
Turning a layer into a knockout 4m 41s
33. Refine Edge and Layer Masks 59m 43s
Refine Edges 1m 28s
Laying down a base layer mask 6m 49s
Introducing the Refine Edge/Mask command 7m 57s
Edge detection and Smart Radius 4m 42s
Using the Refine Radius tool 7m 31s
The transformative power of Refine Edge 3m 37s
Perfecting a mask with overlay painting 10m 58s
Combining Quick Selection with Refine Mask 10m 37s
Bolstering and integrating hair 6m 4s
34. The Pen Tool 1h 18m
The Pen tool 1m 50s
Pixel-based masking versus the Pen tool 6m 45s
Drawing a straight-sided path outline 6m 57s
Moving, deleting, and adding anchor points 6m 10s
Dragging control handles to modify curves 5m 27s
Converting a path outline to a vector mask 5m 36s
Customizing a geometric shape 5m 53s
How to position points and control handles 7m 7s
Drawing smooth points with the Pen tool 8m 7s
Duplicating and scaling a vector mask 5m 21s
Cusp points and the Rubber Band option 6m 21s
Setting anchor points in the pasteboard 6m 8s
Using the Convert Point tool 6m 43s

Join industry expert and award-winning author Deke McClelland in the fourth and final installment of his popular Photoshop CS6 One-on-One series. In this course, Deke puts his own spin on the most powerful features in Adobe Photoshop, including the Art filters, which enable you to transform an image into a digital painting, and Photomerge, which can stitch together multiple photos into a single panorama. Plus, dive into the extended features like 3D lighting effects, the Puppet Warp and animation toolset, high dynamic range (HDR) imaging, video editing, automated adjustments with actions, and much more.
Topics include:
- Combining multiple Filter Gallery effects
- Converting an image into etched outlines
- Using the new Oil Paint filter
- Lighting a watermark texture map
- Manually straightening a GoPro photo
- Correcting a panorama with the Adaptive Wide Angle filter
- Applying Puppet Warp to editable text
- Converting layers into animated frames
- Adding transitions, text, and sound to videos
- Creating an authentic HDR portrait shot
- Working with advanced layers
- Creating a dynamically adjustable action

$30

Content:

35. Art Filters and Oil Paint 1h 22m
Welcome to One-on-One 2m 0s
Introducing the Filter Gallery 7m 25s
Modifying Filter Gallery settings 4m 27s
Combining multiple Filter Gallery effects 7m 28s
The strange power of the Sketch filters 7m 19s
Converting an image to etched outlines 5m 58s
Turning those outlines into "digital ink" 4m 21s
Duplicating a complex Smart Filter sequence 5m 31s
Customizing a filter effect for a new image 6m 47s
Tracking Filter Gallery effects by name 4m 2s
Pencil sketching one image onto another 6m 26s
Brightening eyes and teeth in a filtered portrait 8m 46s
Using the new Oil Paint filter 8m 8s
Customizing an effect with a filter mask 3m 56s
36. Lighting Effects 40m 19s
Shining light onto a photograph 55s
Introducing the Lighting Effects filter 9m 24s
Creating a custom, colorful vignette 4m 22s
Creating an angled watermark pattern 5m 24s
Lighting a watermark texture map 6m 22s
Turning text into a soft texture map 3m 45s
Creating raised credit-card-style letters 5m 4s
Wrapping an image using a displacement map 5m 3s
37. Panoramas and Wide Angle 33m 46s
Correcting barrel distortion and panoramas 1m 1s
Introducing the Adaptive Wide Angle filter 4m 16s
Drawing polygonal constraints 4m 10s
Manually straightening a GoPro photo 4m 58s
Stitching together a seamless panorama 4m 35s
Correcting a panorama with Adaptive Wide Angle 6m 57s
Aligning constraints and overcorrecting 7m 49s
38. Puppet Warp and Animation 51m 57s
Distorting an extracted image 53s
Extracting a foreground from a background 3m 30s
Introducing the Puppet Warp command 5m 1s
Changing the mode and adding rotation 4m 58s
Adjusting the Expansion value 4m 0s
Using Pin Depth and Density 4m 36s
Applying Puppet Warp to editable text 6m 41s
Creating an intermediate text frame 3m 16s
Converting layers into animated frames 6m 50s
Tweening and animating text 5m 10s
Exporting a QuickTime movie and GIF animation 7m 2s
39. Editing Video 1h 10m
Why edit video in Photoshop? 46s
Loading video clips into Photoshop 6m 4s
Creating gradually fading transitions 6m 10s
Activating a few painless keyboard shortcuts 3m 41s
Adding text to your video 5m 21s
Combining your text into video groups 4m 57s
Adding motion to text (or any layer) 5m 33s
Adding soundtracks and voiceovers 6m 50s
Exporting and examining your video 6m 14s
Editing an existing video comp 8m 55s
Adding a video clip to the start of a track 5m 38s
Superimposing video clips with blend modes 4m 49s
Applying a Smart Filter to an entire video clip 5m 33s
40. Advanced Layers 1h 7m
Merging multiple exposures in Photoshop 1m 36s
Automatically aligning bracketed photographs 4m 13s
Preparing bracketed photos in Camera Raw 4m 47s
Introducing the HDR Pro command 4m 12s
How the HDR Pro settings work 4m 56s
Dramatically increasing the detail in a photo 7m 45s
Adding a curve in HDR Pro to heighten reality 9m 9s
Creating a faux-HDR effect in Camera Raw 6m 17s
Simulating HDR exposures in Camera Raw 6m 57s
Merging simulated exposures in HDR Pro 7m 17s
Creating an authentic HDR portrait shot 6m 12s
Softening an HDR portrait shot 4m 28s
41. High Dynamic Range 1h 5m
Managing the multilayer experience 1m 47s
Renaming a sequence of layers 5m 35s
Refining the Layers list using filter icons 3m 31s
Searching by name, effect, and blend mode 5m 20s
Color property, hide, show, and lock 5m 28s
Deleting empty layers; replacing fonts 4m 34s
Grouping layers by name 7m 53s
Masking groups and effects in one operation 5m 28s
Expanding and collapsing all groups and effects 3m 43s
Introducing layer comps 4m 4s
Creating a dynamic layer comp 5m 34s
Applying a mode or effect to an entire group 8m 55s
Moving many layers without upsetting comps 3m 28s
42. Actions 59m 43s
Three incentives for recording actions 1m 47s
Introducing the Actions panel 6m 31s
Recording a simple but practical action 6m 0s
Modifying settings and playing an action 4m 16s
Creating a dynamically adjustable action 5m 21s
Adding steps to an existing action 7m 56s
Actioning a consistent image resolution 7m 37s
Modifying an adjustment and adding Save As 5m 38s
Actioning the creation of a flat CMYK image 4m 6s
Batch-processing an entire folder of images 6m 22s
Saving and loading your actions 4m 9s
Conclusion 2m 11s
See ya 2m 11s

This course explores the newest version of Adobe Photoshop from a photographer’s perspective—helping users of previous Photoshop versions make upgrade decisions and get up to speed with CS6. Author Chris Orwig covers the improvements to Camera Raw, from the expanded exposure controls to the upgraded Adjustment Brush and Lens Correction tools, as well as the many enhancements to Photoshop. He covers the new Layers panel behavior, which makes renaming and organizing layers almost effortless; new image adjustment techniques, such as on-the-fly Liquify adjustments, content-aware retouching, photorealistic blur effects, configurable light sources, and redefined nondestructive cropping; plus the brand-new ability to edit video in Photoshop. This course promises to get photographers excited—and informed—about what's in store for them in Photoshop CS6.
Topics include:
* Getting familiar with the new interface
* Exploring improvements to Bridge and Mini Bridge
* Recovering highlights and improving exposure with Camera Raw
* Making precise raw adjustments with the Point Tone Curve
* Grouping, filtering, and finding layers
* Correcting distortion with Adaptive Wide Angle controls
* Working with the new Content-Aware tools
* Making better selections
* Performing perspective cropping
* Getting started with video in Photoshop
* Making picture-perfect prints with the Print dialog

$30

Content:

Welcome 02m 08s
Welcome 01m 25s
Using the exercise files 00m 43s
1. Getting to Know the New Photoshop 12m 23s
Getting familiar with and customizing the interface 03m 26s
Arranging photos and choosing Screen Mode options 02m 06s
Selecting a workspace 02m 47s
Introducing Auto-Save and Background Save 04m 04s
2. Improvements in Bridge and Mini Bridge 08m 23s
Creating a contact sheet in Bridge or Photoshop 04m 02s
Working with Mini Bridge 04m 21s
3. Adobe Camera Raw Improvements 31m 23s
Introducing the new basic tone controls 03m 18s
Learning about the basic controls 03m 42s
Enhancing and correcting your images with more power 03m 35s
Updating the processed version of legacy files 03m 11s
Adding midtone contrast with a better Clarity control 04m 20s
Utilizing the new Adjustment Brush features 04m 59s
Painting away moiré patterns 02m 40s
Making precise adjustments with the Point Tone Curve panel 03m 39s
Using lens corrections to remove color fringing 01m 59s
4. Increased Flexibility with the Layers Panel 28m 49s
Applying layer style effects to a group 02m 24s
Working with groups and filtering 07m 50s
Blending and renaming layers 05m 46s
Free transforming a layer with the Bicubic Automatic interpolation option 05m 28s
Filtering and finding layers 04m 15s
Using a shortcut to change the fill and opacity of a layer 03m 06s
5. Working with the Blur Gallery 12m 37s
Adding Field Blur 03m 24s
Working with Iris Blur 03m 55s
Enhancing photographs with the Tilt-Shift Blur tool 05m 18s
6. Using the New Content-Aware Tools 21m 24s
Making content-aware corrections with the Patch tool 04m 33s
Using the Content-Aware Move tool 07m 03s
Making effective selections for Content-Aware Move 06m 54s
Finishing the project and extending the canvas 02m 54s
7. Making General Image Adjustments 43m 29s
Using the Properties panel 03m 04s
Making automatic adjustments 06m 04s
Cropping redefined 06m 09s
Using perspective cropping 02m 48s
Adding a light source with Lighting Effects 06m 26s
Working with Liquify in real time 02m 52s
Making adjustments with the Adaptive Wide Angle filter 07m 22s
Using Face-Aware Mask Generation 03m 01s
Sizing images with the Bicubic Automatic interpolation option 01m 53s
Changing brush characteristics and making paths 03m 50s
8. Editing Video in Photoshop 27m 06s
Getting started with video in Photoshop 05m 45s
Adding typography and audio to a video project 05m 13s
Working with multiple clips 04m 41s
Adding audio and transitions and exporting the final project 06m 21s
Thinking creatively about working with video 05m 06s
9. Making Picture-Perfect Prints 04m 23s
Working with the new Print dialogue 04m 23s
Conclusion 00m 33s
Goodbye 00m 33s

In Photoshop CS6 Essential Training, Julieanne Kost demonstrates how to produce high-quality images in a short amount of time, using a combination of Adobe Photoshop CS6, Bridge, and Camera Raw.
The course details the Photoshop features and creative options, and shows efficient ways to perform common editing tasks, including noise reduction, shadow and highlight detail recovery, retouching, and combining multiple images. Along the way, the course explores techniques for nondestructive editing and compositing using layers, blending modes, layer masks, and much more.
Topics include:
* Organizing images in Bridge
* Adding metadata such as copyrights and keywords
* Editing in Camera Raw versus in Photoshop
* Retouching in Camera Raw
* Batch processing files
* Customizing the Photoshop workspaces
* Choosing a file format and resolution
* Cropping, scaling, and rotating images
* Working with layers, including merging and flattening layers
* Creating selections and layer masks
* Toning and changing the color of images
* Adjusting shadows and highlights
* Retouching and cloning
* Creating panoramas from multiple images
* Adding filters and sharpening
* Working with blend modes
* Adding type
* Working with video in Photoshop CS6

$30

Content:

Adobe Photoshop 1m 42s
What is Photoshop? 1m 42s
Introduction 1m 11s
Welcome 1m 11s
1. It Begins in Bridge 32m 15s
What is Adobe Bridge? 2m 49s
Getting photos from a camera 4m 27s
A tour of workspaces in Bridge 5m 32s
Customizing how thumbnails are displayed 3m 44s
Changing file names and batch renaming 2m 58s
Adding basic metadata with metadata templates 5m 10s
Creating and applying keywords to images 4m 58s
Viewing images in Full Screen Preview mode 2m 37s
2. Whittling Down to Keepers 27m 1s
Using Review mode to filter out rejected images 4m 18s
Saving images in collections 4m 23s
Rating and labeling images 3m 46s
Using the Filter panel to view different subsets 4m 16s
Using smart collections 4m 18s
Viewing final selects in a slideshow 2m 21s
Organizing groups of images into stacks 3m 39s
3. Camera Raw Essentials 32m 8s
Comparing RAW and JPEG files 6m 10s
Starting in Camera Raw instead of Photoshop 3m 12s
Touring the Camera Raw interface 9m 13s
Previewing before and after adjustments 3m 58s
Toggling onscreen shadow and highlight clipping warnings 3m 11s
Choosing output settings 3m 36s
Saving a copy without going to Photoshop 2m 48s
4. Fixing Common Problems Using Camera Raw 42m 41s
Using the nondestructive Crop tool 4m 42s
Correcting a horizon line with the Straighten tool 2m 41s
Fixing color casts with the White Balance tool 3m 50s
Fixing blown-out highlights 2m 56s
Revealing hidden shadow details 3m 7s
Reducing color noise with Noise Reduction 3m 59s
Correcting lens distortion 3m 25s
Making perspective corrections to images 2m 40s
Removing color fringing and chromatic aberrations 2m 28s
Sharpening the details 7m 45s
Making an average photo great 5m 8s
5. Retouching and Creative Techniques in Camera Raw 51m 19s
Using the Graduated Filter tool 6m 57s
Making local adjustments with the Adjustments Brush 10m 19s
Retouching blemishes with the Spot Removal tool 3m 41s
Exploring a quick portrait retouching technique using Clarity 4m 31s
Converting to black and white 2m 36s
Editing images directly with the Targeted Adjustment tool 3m 21s
Creating selective color effects with the Adjustment Brush 6m 5s
Using sepia and split-tone effects 3m 33s
Adding digital film grain texture effects 2m 20s
Adding vignettes and border effects 4m 16s
Saving variations within a single file with the Snapshot command 3m 40s
6. Automating Camera Raw 15m 13s
Copying and pasting settings across files 2m 4s
Processing multiple files in Camera Raw 3m 22s
Saving and using the library of Camera Raw presets 6m 48s
Using Image Processor to batch process files 2m 59s
7. Photoshop Interface Essentials 30m 24s
Opening files from Bridge 2m 7s
Opening files from Mini Bridge 2m 51s
Customizing the Mini Bridge panel 3m 59s
Using the Application frame 3m 34s
Managing panels 5m 14s
Switching and saving workspaces 4m 39s
Switching tools using the keyboard 2m 47s
Customizing the keyboard shortcuts 5m 13s
8. Documents and Navigation 10m 25s
Working with tabbed documents 1m 34s
Arranging documents 1m 52s
Stopping Photoshop from tabbing documents 1m 32s
Panning and zooming 3m 14s
Cycling through different screen modes 2m 13s
9. Digital Image Essentials 15m 44s
Understanding file formats 4m 36s
Choosing the resolution you need 4m 39s
Understanding Resize vs. Resample 4m 11s
Working with print sizes and resolution 2m 18s
10. Cropping and Transformations 32m 53s
Using Undo and the History panel 3m 7s
Using crop options 3m 54s
Understanding Hide vs. Delete for the Crop tool 1m 46s
Bringing back hidden pixels with Reveal All 40s
Making the canvas bigger with the Crop tool 3m 31s
Making the canvas bigger using the Relative option in the Canvas Size command 2m 18s
Using the Perspective Crop tool 1m 27s
Straightening a crooked image 2m 29s
Scaling, skewing, and rotating with Free Transform 5m 46s
Making nondestructive transformations with Smart Objects 2m 34s
Warping images 2m 48s
Preserving important elements with Content-Aware Scale 2m 33s
11. Working with Layers 30m 41s
Exploring layer basics 11m 16s
Loading, selecting, and transforming layers 8m 4s
Organizing layers using layer groups 5m 3s
Merging, rasterizing, and flattening layers 6m 18s
12. Selections and Layer Masks 43m 11s
Using the Marquee and Lasso tools 5m 43s
Combining selections 4m 4s
Converting a selection into a layer mask 5m 29s
Using the Quick Selection tool 4m 35s
Selecting soft-edged objects using Refine Edge 9m 42s
Touching up a layer mask with the Brush tool 7m 22s
Changing the opacity, size, and hardness of the painting tools 3m 17s
Blending images with a gradient layer mask 2m 59s
13. Tone and Color with Adjustment Layers 34m 36s
Introducing adjustment layers 3m 47s
Starting with a preset 2m 18s
Improving tonal quality with Levels 5m 31s
Increasing midtone contrast with Curves 6m 44s
Removing a color cast with Auto Color 2m 30s
Changing the color temperature with Photo Filter 2m 29s
Shifting colors with Hue/Saturation 4m 41s
Making washed-out colors pop with Vibrance 2m 48s
Converting color to black and white 1m 47s
Controlling which layers are affected by an adjustment layer 2m 1s
14. Options for Tone and Color Correction 19m 33s
Adjusting shadows and highlights 5m 44s
Replacing color using Selective Color 3m 49s
Using fill layers to create a hand-painted look 6m 5s
Using a gradient fill layer to add a color wash 3m 55s
15. Retouching Essentials 52m 9s
Removing blemishes with the Spot Healing Brush and the Patch tool 12m 42s
De-emphasizing wrinkles with the Healing Brush 4m 52s
Smoothing skin and pores with the High Pass filter 6m 19s
Making teeth bright and white with a Hue/Saturation adjustment layer 3m 21s
Brightening eyes with Curves 7m 0s
Taming flyaway hair with the Patch tool 3m 44s
Removing unwanted details with Content-Aware Fill 5m 49s
Body sculpting with Liquify 8m 22s
16. Combining Multiple Images 24m 12s
Creating panoramas with Photomerge and Auto-Blend 4m 48s
Combining multiple frames in an action sequence 8m 44s
Swapping heads in a family portrait 10m 40s
17. Essential Filters 38m 26s
Overview of filters 2m 52s
Applying filters nondestructively using Smart Filters 5m 18s
Creating a soft glow with the Gaussian Blur filter 3m 35s
Creating an infrared look with Diffuse Glow 2m 14s
Adding noise with the Add Noise filter 6m 27s
Sharpening an image with Unsharp Mask 5m 11s
Giving an image texture with the Texturizer filter 1m 49s
Using the Field, Iris, and Tilt-Shift Blurs 6m 1s
Creating a painting with the Oil Paint filter 1m 34s
Applying a filter to multiple layers 3m 25s
18. Essential Blend Modes 22m 16s
Cycling through the blending modes 6m 42s
Adding a lens flare effect with Screen 2m 40s
Scanning or photographing paper to add a deckled edge 3m 1s
Making a cast shadow more realistic with Multiply 5m 21s
Sharpening an image with High Pass and Overlay 2m 26s
Adding a realistic off-center vignette 2m 6s
19. Type Essentials 20m 9s
Exploring character (point) type 7m 6s
Adding paragraph (area) type 3m 38s
Adding type on a path 4m 44s
Clipping an image inside type 3m 3s
Warping type 1m 38s
20. Layer Effects and Styles 15m 57s
Adding a drop shadow effect 6m 15s
Adding edges, textures, and color overlays using layer styles 4m 27s
Creating a transparent logo or watermark 2m 42s
Knowing how and when to scale layer effects 2m 33s
21. Sharing Images 15m 45s
Creating contact sheets 2m 49s
Using the Output workspace in Bridge 5m 32s
Exporting web photo galleries 4m 20s
Saving for the web 3m 4s
22. Video in Photoshop 23m 38s
Working with video clips 9m 29s
Adding special effects to video 5m 45s
Adding pans and zooms to still images 8m 24s
Conclusion 1m 10s
Goodbye 1m 10s

In Photoshop CS6 for Photographers, author, photographer, and teacher Chris Orwig explores Photoshop from the perspective of the photographer.
The course details the features and techniques behind enhancing and retouching photos, preparing them for print and online publishing, and much more. Chris demonstrates how to make basic edits in Camera Raw, develop and save color profiles, work with layers and selections, tone and sharpen, and retouch images while retaining their natural character.
Chris also shares some creative tips and project ideas, such as converting a photo to black-and-white and enhancing a portrait with hand-painted masks. The course also covers workflow details, such as organizing images in Bridge and Mini Bridge, optimizing Photoshop preferences, and calibrating your monitor.
Topics include:
* Getting started with Bridge and Mini Bridge
* Setting up color and performance preferences
* Calibrating your monitor
* Improving images with the basic controls in Camera Raw
* Creating, aligning, and organizing layers
* Using masks for removing or blending images and for sharpening
* Working with vibrancy, hue, and saturation controls
* Enhancing color and tone with Levels
* Using Curves and masks to enhance brightness, color, and tone
* Mastering the art of blending modes
* Correcting and replacing color
* Burning and dodging
* Converting to black and white

$30

Content:

Introduction 1m 43s
Welcome 58s
Using the exercise files 45s
1. Strategies for Learning 11m 49s
Ideas for how to learn Photoshop more effectively 4m 25s
Isolating what you've learned and taking quality notes 3m 53s
Getting creative and being ready to be surprised 3m 31s
2. Getting Started with Bridge and Mini Bridge 38m 57s
Customizing the Bridge workspace 4m 46s
Reviewing and evaluating your photos 4m 22s
Rating, ranking, and filtering photographs 5m 42s
Organizing photos with stacks 3m 55s
Grouping pictures together with collections 3m 56s
Adding metadata and keywords 4m 47s
Renaming images 1m 45s
Accessing the Photoshop tools from within Bridge 2m 28s
Working with Bridge and Photoshop 2m 40s
Working with Mini Bridge 4m 36s
3. Color Settings and Preferences 45m 29s
Setting up your color settings 3m 31s
Choosing preferences for the HUD color picker 3m 50s
Setting image interpolation preferences 3m 3s
Modifying zoom preferences 4m 20s
Changing HUD brush options 3m 41s
Customizing interface preferences 3m 30s
Opening up documents in tabs 4m 11s
Reviewing file-handling preferences 5m 4s
Setting performance preferences 4m 23s
Choosing cursor preferences 5m 14s
Reviewing guides and type preview preferences 4m 42s
4. Foundations of Color Management 21m 4s
Exploring two simple steps for more accurate color 2m 57s
Introducing color profiles 5m 17s
Opening and saving files with embedded profiles 7m 33s
Setting up your studio 1m 59s
A demonstration of monitor calibration 1m 46s
Finding color management resources 1m 32s
5. Getting Started with Photoshop 28m 34s
Introducing the Tools panel 4m 53s
Changing the view mode and working with panels 5m 33s
Opening and arranging multiple documents 6m 31s
Combining, saving, and closing multiple documents 5m 17s
Creating custom keyboard shortcuts 5m 11s
Working with a Wacom tablet 1m 9s
6. Understanding Digital Images 18m 24s
The foundation of digital imaging: pixels and bit depth 6m 12s
Introducing image resizing 3m 42s
Resizing images effectively 3m 48s
Resizing and straightening with the Crop tool 2m 28s
Creative tip: sizing images correctly 2m 14s
7. Working in Camera Raw 41m 56s
What is Camera Raw? 2m 47s
Accessing the Camera Raw preferences 3m 16s
Improving your images with the basic controls 7m 0s
Correcting color and white balance 4m 44s
Processing multiple images at once 5m 56s
Utilizing the Crop tool to recompose your pictures 5m 28s
Creating dramatic black-and-white conversions 5m 34s
Reducing noise and making tack-sharp photos 7m 11s
8. Utilizing Layers 32m 55s
Introducing layers 2m 22s
Understanding layers and layer transparency 1m 29s
Working with layer opacity 3m 29s
Aligning layers 1m 32s
Creating new layers 4m 53s
Organizing layers 2m 31s
Filtering and finding layers 2m 8s
Adding layer style effects 5m 28s
Creating a clipping mask 6m 50s
Targeting and moving layers 2m 13s
9. Making Selections 33m 22s
Making selections with the marquee tools 4m 50s
Using the three lasso tools 4m 56s
Selecting with the Magic Wand tool 5m 43s
Working with the Quick Select tool 7m 21s
Selecting based on color with the Color Range controls 7m 13s
Correcting skin tones with Color Range 3m 19s
10. Using the Masking Panel 23m 2s
Introducing masking 1m 14s
Painting away the contents of a layer with a mask 3m 59s
Using a selection to build a mask 3m 3s
Removing a subject from the background with a mask 6m 37s
Using a mask to selectively sharpen an image 3m 58s
Making selections with Quick Mask 4m 11s
11. Adding Custom Borders 13m 42s
Creating a custom border using selections and masks 5m 4s
Painting custom border effects 3m 34s
Using prebuilt borders 4m 13s
Exploring the PhotoFrame plug-in 51s
12. Improving Your Images with Adjustments 11m 49s
Adding brightness and contrast 3m 3s
Using hue and saturation and the Target Adjustment tool 5m 34s
Working with vibrancy and saturation 3m 12s
13. Using Levels to Correct and Enhance 14m 36s
Working with auto levels 3m 36s
Enhancing color and tone with levels 4m 12s
Painting in adjustments with levels and masking 4m 10s
Creative tip: checking in 2m 38s
14. Making Color and Tone Adjustments with Curves 29m 50s
Introducing the Curves dialog box 3m 12s
Using auto curves and adjustments to enhance an image 4m 17s
Changing brightness with curves and masks 3m 59s
Using curves and masks to improve tone and color 4m 56s
Making advanced selections and masks 3m 53s
Enhancing a portrait with hand-painted masks 5m 53s
Using, modifying, and saving curves presets 3m 40s
15. The Art of Blending Modes 20m 12s
Introducing the magic of blend modes 6m 33s
Blending multiple images together 3m 50s
Using blending modes to remove white or black 2m 8s
Improving exposure, contrast, and color with blending 5m 37s
Using blending shortcuts 2m 4s
16. Correcting Color 10m 26s
Working with color correction in Camera Raw 1m 21s
Correcting color with the eyedroppers 3m 11s
Correcting color and tone with the eyedroppers 5m 54s
17. Enhancing Colors 36m 1s
Using a Replace Color adjustment 4m 14s
Using Replace Color, Hue/Saturation, and masks 5m 32s
Replacing color with advanced masking 7m 14s
Selecting and modifying color with the Hue/Saturation eyedroppers 2m 30s
Using Color Balance to create vivid color 4m 3s
Modifying color with Selective Color 5m 3s
Changing color with Photo Filter 4m 4s
Making creative color changes with Color Lookup 1m 44s
Creative tip: shoot more 1m 37s
18. Burning and Dodging 35m 13s
The modern equivalent of a traditional technique 1m 40s
Introducing two burn and dodge techniques 7m 22s
Burning and dodging with the Brush and Gradient tools 4m 18s
Dodging and reducing shadows in a portrait 6m 0s
Using selections, masks, and curves to change tonality 7m 21s
Improving a black-and-white landscape 8m 32s
19. Converting to Black and White 16m 9s
The power of black and white 4m 14s
Converting a portrait to black and white 4m 6s
Converting a landscape to black and white 4m 23s
Adding grain and tone to a black-and-white image 3m 26s
20. Working with Filters 31m 57s
Introducing Smart Filters 3m 36s
Applying Smart Filters 6m 20s
Creating a soft contrast effect 6m 38s
Changing focus with the Blur Gallery 3m 40s
Working with Tilt-Shift Blur 3m 52s
Creating a realistic lens flare 2m 45s
Adding light with the Lighting Effects filter 5m 6s
21. Removing Noise 12m 33s
Using the Noise Reduction filter 3m 46s
Exploring advanced noise reduction using channels 2m 49s
Masking in noise reduction to a specific area 2m 1s
Reducing noise with Surface Blur 3m 57s
22. Basic Image Cleanup 48m 30s
Cleaning before you enhance 1m 2s
Introducing the healing and cloning tools 7m 22s
Cleaning up the background of an image 6m 21s
Basic portrait retouching 3m 15s
Brightening shadows under the eyes 4m 53s
Brightening the eyes 2m 30s
Retouching selected areas 5m 27s
Using Content-Aware Fill to remove distractions 5m 34s
Moving a subject with the Content-Aware Move tool 7m 54s
Changing shape and dimension with Liquify 4m 12s
23. Correcting Distortion and Perspective 24m 2s
Using the Lens Correction filter 6m 52s
Reducing exaggerated distortion 5m 16s
Applying Free Transform to correct perspective 3m 49s
Correcting distortion with the Perspective Crop tool 3m 45s
Using Puppet Warp to correct perspective 4m 20s
24. Combining Multiple Images 26m 48s
Combining two photos with movement 4m 12s
Using two frames for a group photo 4m 57s
Creating a panoramic photo from multiple frames 3m 37s
Correcting distortion with the Adaptive Wide Angle correction 7m 34s
Cropping, filling in the gaps, and making final panographic adjustments 6m 28s
25. Sharpening Your Images 27m 24s
Working with Smart Sharpen 6m 17s
Using Unsharpen Mask 4m 49s
High Pass sharpening an image 4m 47s
Selectively sharpening the in-focus areas of an image 3m 35s
Selective sharpening with hand-drawn masks 7m 56s
26. Getting Your Images Online 22m 44s
Preparing images for the web and email 4m 38s
Sharpening for the web 3m 5s
Using Save for Web to create an optimized JPEG 4m 26s
Exporting images to Facebook or Flickr 4m 46s
Creating a web gallery 5m 49s
27. Desktop Printing 26m 6s
Desktop printing recommendations 2m 46s
Creating a PDF layout and contact sheets 5m 56s
Using a soft proof to visualize the print 8m 0s
Adjusting printer settings 3m 43s
Customizing the Print dialog box options 5m 41s
28. Working with Video 32m 4s
Opening up a video file in Photoshop 7m 7s
Editing a video clip and adding text 5m 15s
Using adjustment layers and adding an audio track 4m 47s
Creating a project with multiple clips 4m 55s
Adding a cross-dissolve fade and creating custom shortcuts 4m 43s
Customizing the workspace to review your project 3m 2s
Exporting a project 2m 15s
Conclusion 3m 4s
Exploring additional resources and ways to keep in touch 2m 29s
Goodbye 35s

With the release of Photoshop CS6, Adobe introduced the ability to edit video footage. Author Rich Harrington guides you through this brand-new workflow, from building a sequence to working with audio and exporting your video in a variety of high-quality formats. The course also covers how Photoshop's strongest feature, its image enhancement toolset, translates to video, from fixing under- or overexposed footage, performing color balancing, and adding vibrance and contrast to special effects, such as converting to black and white and using Smart Filters to soften skin.

$30

Content:

Introduction
6m 4s
Welcome
51s
Why use video in Photoshop?
2m 42s
What you should know before taking this course
1m 51s
Using the exercise files
40s
1. Getting Ready for Editing Video in Photoshop
6m 25s
Making sure your system is ready
2m 55s
Exploring the Motion workspace
1m 27s
Looking at supported file formats for editing
2m 3s
2. Meet the Photoshop Timeline
9m 30s
An overview of the Timeline panel
3m 31s
Controlling playback in the timeline
1m 12s
Viewing options in the timeline
2m 50s
Enabling timeline shortcuts
1m 57s
3. Building a Sequence
31m 23s
Understanding the reality of editing video
1m 20s
Setting up the timeline
1m 56s
Building the A-roll
7m 27s
Organizing B-roll
3m 55s
Adding B-roll to the timeline
5m 26s
Editing B-roll in the timeline
4m 5s
Changing the playback speed
1m 25s
Adding transitions
5m 49s
4. Working with Audio
6m 54s
Adjusting volume in clips
3m 15s
Adding a music bed to the timeline
3m 39s
5. Controlling Adjustment Layers
12m 30s
Fixing underexposed footage
1m 14s
Fixing overexposed footage
1m 39s
Adjusting contrast
1m 15s
Color balancing a video shot
1m 15s
Adding vibrance to a video clip
1m 32s
Creating black-and-white effects
1m 11s
Using photo filters
1m 47s
Using Smart Filters to soften skin
2m 37s
6. Working with Text and Graphics
16m 25s
Adding a lower-third graphic
6m 20s
Animating text
4m 15s
Inserting a logo bug
4m 14s
Adding moves to photos
1m 36s
7. Publishing Video
24m 33s
What to do before exporting your video
7m 35s
An overview of the Render Video dialog
3m 27s
Exploring quality-based presets
2m 34s
Exporting H.264 files
3m 18s
Exporting QuickTime files
5m 30s
Exporting a DPX sequence
2m 9s
Conclusion
1m 35s
Goodbye
1m 35s

This course provides in-depth training on Camera Raw 7, the Photoshop CS6 component that enables photographers to open and manipulate raw format images. Raw images are minimally processed in the camera; they’re effectively the exact data recorded by the camera’s sensor. Author Chris Orwig shows you how to control a raw image's appearance—exposure, shadow and highlight detail, color balance, and sharpness—with far more precision than is possible with JPEG images. The course also introduces the new workflow procedures and technical concepts and issues associated with raw content, so that photographers can best leverage this powerful format.
Topics include:
* Comparing the raw, JPG, and TIFF formats
* Converting or saving to the DNG format
* Enhancing color and tone
* Cropping and composing
* Sharpening and noise reduction
* Using the Camera Raw histogram
* Batch editing
* Correcting for under- and overexposure
* Retouching blemishes
* Making lens corrections
* Calibrating your camera
* Speeding up your workflow with actions

$30

Content:

1. Introducing Camera Raw 9m 3s
Welcome 1m 2s
Should I use Camera Raw or Photoshop? 3m 22s
What is Adobe Camera Raw? 3m 45s
Using the exercise files 54s
2. Setting Preferences and File Formats 21m 13s
An overview of Bridge and Bridge preferences 3m 19s
Setting Camera Raw preferences 3m 9s
Exploring RAW vs. JPEG or TIFF files 4m 3s
Choosing a native raw file or a digital negative (DNG) 4m 25s
Converting or saving to the DNG format 6m 17s
3. Camera Raw Workflow Overview 29m 36s
Project overview: cover photo shoot 1m 33s
Auto-toning and correcting white balance 2m 19s
Cropping and composing 3m 21s
Enhancing color and tone 2m 44s
Removing distractions 3m 58s
Sharpening and noise reduction 2m 59s
Converting to black and white 2m 11s
Adding a vignette 1m 45s
Making a localized correction 2m 53s
Creating snapshots of memorable looks 2m 1s
Re-editing camera raw settings 1m 38s
Working with multiple adjustments 2m 14s
4. Getting to Know the Camera Raw Interface 15m 2s
Navigating the interface and the toolbar 2m 15s
Exploring image-adjustment tabs and panels 1m 32s
Using the histogram 5m 12s
Previewing the before and after of different adjustments 2m 43s
Working with multiple files 3m 20s
5. Opening and Saving Files 29m 28s
Opening raw files in Bridge 4m 35s
Opening JPEGs and TIFFs in Bridge 4m 43s
How to open a photo in Photoshop and skip Camera Raw 1m 47s
Accessing Camera Raw from Mini Bridge 3m 9s
Resizing in Camera Raw with workflow options 6m 35s
Opening an image as a Smart Object 3m 3s
Saving from Camera Raw 3m 17s
Creating a duplicate file 2m 19s
6. Cropping, Composing, and Straightening Images 11m 19s
Recomposing with the Crop tool 2m 58s
Clarifying your voice by cropping 3m 20s
Straightening and cropping 2m 54s
Cropping creatively 2m 7s
7. Improving Color with White Balance 9m 9s
Improving color balance 4m 21s
Using the White Balance tool and controls 1m 48s
Color correcting with white balance cards 3m 0s
8. Using the Main Basic Adjustments 18m 32s
Deconstructing the basic adjustments 3m 33s
Correcting overexposure 2m 52s
Correcting underexposure 3m 13s
Making exposure enhancements 2m 52s
Recovering highlight and shadow detail 3m 38s
A speed tip for making basic adjustments 2m 24s
9. Improving Clarity and Color 14m 14s
Demystifying Clarity 2m 36s
Increasing Clarity 3m 52s
Understanding Vibrance and Saturation 1m 50s
Improving color with Vibrance 3m 52s
Making creative color adjustments 2m 4s
10. Using the Tone Curve 11m 48s
Learning about the parametric and point-tone curves 4m 4s
Using the parametric-tone curve 2m 19s
Using the point-tone curve 3m 22s
Creating a unique color look with the point-tone curve 2m 3s
11. Retouching Blemishes 15m 38s
Introducing the Spot Removal tool 3m 42s
Removing distracting background elements 3m 12s
Removing blemishes on a face 3m 29s
Removing dust on the lens or the camera sensor 2m 58s
Removing red-eye 2m 17s
12. Painting in Corrections with the Adjustment Brush 51m 20s
Introducing the Adjustment Brush 6m 18s
Correcting exposure 6m 23s
Working with Auto Mask 4m 16s
Changing the background color 4m 30s
Changing the color temperature 3m 15s
Making multiple color and tone adjustments 5m 47s
Enhancing the color, tone, and sharpness of the eyes 5m 11s
Whitening teeth 3m 20s
Brightening shadows and darkening highlights 2m 51s
Creating a black-and-white effect 5m 36s
Removing moire patterns 2m 19s
Creating Adjustment Brush presets 1m 34s
13. Making Adjustments with the Graduated Filter Tool 10m 0s
Enhancing the foreground and background of an image with the Graduated Filter tool 4m 7s
Reducing exposure with the Graduated Filter tool 3m 0s
Exploring creative effects with the Graduated Filter tool 2m 53s
14. Working with Details 13m 23s
Exploring noise reduction 3m 27s
Applying input sharpening 4m 9s
Using the Basic and Detail panels together 3m 33s
Edge sharpening an architectural photograph 2m 14s
15. Using the HSL Controls 12m 53s
Introducing HSL 2m 8s
Enhancing color and tone 2m 7s
Using the Basic and HSL panels together 2m 24s
Removing colors with HSL 3m 1s
Making color changes 3m 13s
16. Creating Compelling Black-and-White Images 21m 57s
Using the black-and-white controls 1m 44s
Exploring simple black-and-white conversion 6m 17s
Using multiple panels to create a black-and-white image 6m 17s
Creating a dramatic black-and-white landscape 7m 39s
17. Using the Split Toning Controls 11m 1s
Exploring traditional black-and-white toning 3m 19s
Adding split toning to color photographs 3m 49s
Creative toning of a color photo 3m 53s
18. Making Lens Corrections 16m 49s
Removing extreme distortion with a lens profile 2m 2s
Working with the manual Lens Correction controls 2m 33s
Improving a portrait with lens corrections 3m 26s
Adding a darkening vignette effect 1m 28s
Combining lens corrections with creative cropping 3m 35s
Adding distortion for a creative effect 2m 29s
Correcting chromatic aberration and defringing 1m 16s
19. Working with the Effects Panel 15m 10s
Understanding the effects controls 7m 8s
Adding film grain and darkening edges 3m 56s
Cropping and brightening edges 2m 32s
Creating a defined edge 1m 34s
20. Camera Calibration 9m 29s
Introducing the Camera Calibration panel 3m 41s
Creative color with the Camera Calibration controls 3m 25s
Exploring camera calibration resources 2m 23s
21. Saving and Applying Presets 5m 14s
Introducing presets 3m 19s
Exploring free and fun ACR presets 1m 55s
22. Speeding up your Workflow 10m 19s
Quick raw processing of multiple files 2m 21s
Applying raw processing in Bridge 2m 34s
Recording an action 3m 37s
Batch processing multiple images 1m 47s
23. Camera Raw Creativity 7m 52s
A creative color mini-project 5m 12s
Using Camera Raw controls in a non-traditional way 2m 40s
Conclusion 6m 24s
Additional resources 1m 25s
Camera Raw and Lightroom 4m 19s
Goodbye 40s

Join John Derry, one of the world's top experts in natural-media digital painting, as he teaches how to quickly get up to speed painting with the new brush enhancements and capabilities in Adobe Photoshop CS6, such as the Mixer Brush tool presets. These features expand the ability of Photoshop to mimic the real world with new erodible tips and airbrushes. The lessons cover adding textures to brushes, working with erodible dry media, and introduces particulate airbrushes and the Brush Projection feature. This course serves as a concise guide to what's new in Photoshop CS6 for digital painting.
This course was created and produced by John Derry. We are honored to host his tutorials in the lynda.com library.
Topics include:
* Setting up the painting workspace
* Getting acquainted with brush tip types
* Understanding brush behaviors
* Loading your brush with colors
* Managing the tool presets
* Drawing with pencils

$30

Content:

Introduction 38s
Photoshop CS6 Brushes 1h 41m
Installing optional content 2m 34s
Setting up your painting workspace 5m 33s
Getting acquainted with brush tip types 4m 39s
Understanding brush behaviors 3m 13s
Adding texture to brushstrokes: part one 4m 19s
Adding texture to brushstrokes: part two 3m 49s
Adding texture to brushstrokes: part three 7m 24s
Loading a brush with colors 8m 21s
Managing tool presets 4m 59s
Introducing the new airbrush: part one 7m 55s
Introducing the new airbrush: part two 6m 40s
Introducing Brush Projection: part one 4m 44s
Introducing Brush Projection: part two 4m 20s
Cloning with natural media brushes 15m 23s
Working with erodible dry media 6m 12s
Drawing with pencils 11m 22s
Conclusion 35s
Goodbye 35s

Learn to think like a painter and render images that look like they were created with oils or acrylics, using the latest digital artist's tools. Author and artist John Derry introduces the process of interpreting a photograph into a painted work of art. He begins by explaining his system of visual vocabularies, which describe how to replace the visual characteristics of a photograph with that of expressive painting, and also shares the custom brush sets and actions he uses to achieve these results in Adobe Photoshop. The course also covers working with filters, layers, effects, and more to add further detail and texture.
Topics include:
Setting up a Wacom tablet
Removing lens distortions
Correcting distracting image elements
Making shadow and highlight adjustments
Simplifying details with filters and Smart Blur
Modifying color
Cloning layers
Using a traditional paint color swatch set
Using custom actions
Working with canvas texture
Creating physical surface texture effects
Painting with custom brushes

$30

Content:

Introduction 26m 8s
Introduction 1m 7s
Using the exercise files 32s
Installing custom content 2m 46s
Setting up Wacom express keys 13m 32s
Setting Wacom touch ring preferences 2m 14s
Setting Wacom stylus preferences 3m 24s
Division of labor: Image prep and painting 2m 33s
1. Photographic Reality vs. Expressive Interpretation 19m 9s
Visual vocabularies 3m 49s
The vocabulary of photography 7m 38s
The vocabulary of painting 4m 59s
Looking at reality through a mental painting filter 2m 43s
2. Image Preparation: Working with the Source Photograph 38m 57s
Removing lens distortion with the Adaptive Wide Angle filter 6m 47s
Removing distractions 8m 7s
Don't be a slave to the original photograph 10m 51s
Correcting image adjustments 2m 58s
Telling a story with added image elements 10m 14s
3. Image Preparation: Modifying Tones 25m 2s
The eye has a better sensor than a camera 3m 2s
Adding natural shadows with Field Blur 8m 47s
Using the Shadow/Highlight adjustment filter 7m 48s
Using the HDR Toning filter 5m 25s
4. Image Preparation: Modifying Color and Detail 39m 56s
Resolution is in the brushstrokes 3m 26s
Using the Surface Blur filter 6m 17s
Using the Displacement filter to add imperfections 6m 22s
Using the Oil Paint filter 11m 51s
Making tonal and color corrections 12m 0s
5. Using Nondestructive Layer Painting 22m 40s
Nondestructive layer painting (NDLP): Your creative safety net 5m 54s
Setting up the Mixer Brush cloning action 7m 29s
Using cloning layers 2m 58s
Working with adjustment layers 6m 19s
6. Working with Brushes 20m 7s
Using tool presets and not brushes 3m 41s
Categorizing and organizing brushes 6m 14s
Adding canvas texture 4m 51s
Using Sample All Layers 5m 21s
7. Expressive Interpretation: The Underpainting Layer 14m 48s
You must destroy detail 2m 9s
Establishing compositional structure 3m 46s
Determining a style and sticking to it 7m 30s
Painting in progress: Finishing the underpainting layer 1m 23s
8. Expressive Interpretation: The Intermediate Layer 26m 40s
Understanding simplified indication 9m 9s
Understanding color: Warm advances, cool retreats 4m 9s
Painting in progress: Introducing texture to the intermediate layer 13m 22s
9. Expressive Interpretation: The Detail Layer 40m 19s
The play's the thing 5m 18s
Focusing on the subject through detail 4m 40s
Using a traditional paint color swatch set 4m 37s
Painting in progress: Completing the detail layer 16m 25s
Adding surface texture effects 9m 19s
10. Expressive Interpretation: Final Refinements 12m 47s
It pays to wait a day 1m 55s
Adjusting your importance hierarchy 4m 49s
You'll never paint the same thing twice 2m 7s
Helpful resources and inspiration 3m 56s

In this collection of Photoshop CS6 tutorials we will learn the fundamental tools, techniques and workflows for Photoshop CS6. It can safely be said that Photoshop is truly the backbone of the computer graphics industry. From video games to movies and every area in between, Photoshop is one of the most commonly used application by working professionals in any creative field. Now learning how to use a program like Photoshop can seem like a daunting task. Throughout this course, our goal is to teach you the tools, concepts and workflows you will need to succeed with Photoshop. Not only this, but we will break them down so that they are easy to understand. We will dive in and learn about every key area, providing you with a solid foundation. It’s important to us that you not only learn the basics of Photoshop but that you also develop good habits when it comes to this truly amazing application.

$30

Content:

Lesson 1
Introduction and project overview
12:42
Lesson 2
Diving in head first with a mini-project
09:53
Lesson 3
Continuing the mini-project
14:56
Lesson 4
Interface and UI overview
13:41
Lesson 5
Creating, opening and saving files
10:17
Lesson 6
Opening and managing multiple files at once
06:48
Lesson 7
Utilizing workspaces
06:49
Lesson 8
Understanding Photoshop’s rulers, grids, and guides
16:29
Lesson 9
Resizing vs. resampling
08:48
Lesson 10
Zooming, panning and the navigator panel
08:49
Lesson 11
Straightening an image with the ruler tool
05:32
Lesson 12
Cropping an image
12:29
Lesson 13
Layers panel overview
08:47
Lesson 14
Using the move tool in Photoshop
07:23
Lesson 15
Managing multiple Photoshop layers
03:34
Lesson 16
Locking Photoshop layers
03:35
Lesson 17
Undos and the history panel
06:12
Lesson 18
Enhancing an image with layer styles
06:13
Lesson 19
Using smart objects in Photoshop
05:13
Lesson 20
Filtering layers in the layers panel
04:53
Lesson 21
Making selections with the marquee tools
09:44
Lesson 22
Making selections with the lasso tools
09:19
Lesson 23
Using the quick selection and magic wand tools
09:24
Lesson 24
Refining and modifying Photoshop selections
08:54
Lesson 25
Using the Quick Mask mode to create selections
06:15
Lesson 26
Saving and loading selections
06:04
Lesson 27
Selecting ranges of colors
02:29
Lesson 28
Inverting selections in Photoshop
02:28
Lesson 29
Transforming layers in Photoshop
04:45
Lesson 30
Removing the background layer from your document
02:43
Lesson 31
Content-aware scaling in Photoshop
03:03
Lesson 32
Puppet warp in Photoshop
04:26
Lesson 33
Using adjustment layers in Photoshop
04:24
Lesson 34
Brightness and contrast adjustment
04:25
Lesson 35
Understanding a histogram in Photoshop
06:19
Lesson 36
Levels adjustments in Photoshop
06:20
Lesson 37
Curves adjustments in Photoshop
08:34
Lesson 38
Adjusting the hue and saturation of an image
07:16
Lesson 39
Threshold adjustment in Photoshop
01:47
Lesson 40
Gradient maps in Photoshop
03:56
Lesson 41
Converting color images to black and white
06:07
Lesson 42
Document color modes
06:20
Lesson 43
Background and foreground color picker
08:37
Lesson 44
Color and swatch panels in Photoshop
06:03
Lesson 45
Using the eyedropper tool
05:51
Lesson 46
Filling selections with the paint bucket
08:05
Lesson 47
Content aware and history filling
07:18
Lesson 48
Content aware moving and extending
07:41
Lesson 49
Using and customizing gradients
13:51
Lesson 50
Brush basics
13:31
Lesson 51
Customizing brush dynamics in the brush panel
12:49
Lesson 52
Defining a custom brush preset
12:50
Lesson 53
Working with presets and the preset manager in Photoshop
08:52
Lesson 54
Painting with natural bristle brushes
09:09
Lesson 55
Painting with air brushes
09:10
Lesson 56
Painting erodible brush tips
06:18
Lesson 57
Blending colors with the smudge tool
06:17
Lesson 58
Blending colors with the mixer brush
07:20
Lesson 59
Painting in time with the history brush
09:39
Lesson 60
Duplicating pixels with the clone stamp tool
09:31
Lesson 61
Repairing an image with the healing brush
07:49
Lesson 62
Repairing an image with the spot healing brushes
06:47
Lesson 63
Repairing an image with the patch tool
07:17
Lesson 64
Dodging and burning an image
05:35
Lesson 65
Enhancing an image with the sponge tool
11:35
Lesson 66
Erasing tools and workflows
11:07
Lesson 67
Exploring layer masks in Photoshop
11:08
Lesson 68
Refining masks for increased precision
04:37
Lesson 69
Clipping Masks
05:15
Lesson 70
Drawing paths with the Pen tool
13:03
Lesson 71
Creating shapes with the Shape tools
06:45
Lesson 72
Using the custom shape tool
05:33
Lesson 73
Understanding how to implement vector shapes in Photoshop
15:24
Lesson 74
Adding text to an image
14:55
Lesson 75
Managing large amounts of text using character and paragraph styles
12:36
Lesson 76
Blurring an image in Photoshop
04:34
Lesson 77
Using the blur gallery in Photoshop CS6
08:32
Lesson 78
Sharpening an image
06:15
Lesson 79
Exploring the filter gallery
06:16
Lesson 80
Using smart filters in Photoshop
08:04
Lesson 81
Liquifying images in Photoshop
09:40
Lesson 82
Exploring the timeline panel in Photoshop
10:51
Lesson 83
Editing a video in Photoshop
15:34
Lesson 84
Rendering a video out of Photoshop
03:53
Lesson 85
Creating 3D layers in Photoshop
08:02
Lesson 86
Rendering 3D layers
11:41
Lesson 87
Beginning a second mini-project
12:11
Lesson 88
Finishing our second mini-project and conclusion
12:12

In this tutorial we will learn the basics about drawing character faces and heads in the Manga style. The art of Japanese comics known as Manga has been incredibly popular not only in Japan but in the United States for quite some time now. If you’ve ever wondered how to even start drawing in this style, this is the course for you. We will be breaking down the head and face of both Manga males and females and learning how to draw them step by step. First we will learn how to master drawing the trademark eyes of the Manga style. From here we’ll move on and learn how to render the head from the front, side and 3/4 views. Because hair is so important with this style, we’ll spend a few lessons focusing just on it before wrapping up by drawing a few character expressions. After completing this course, you’ll have a good foundation to build so that you can begin developing your own style for drawing Manga.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Let’s draw Manga eyes - Cartoony
03. Let’s draw Manga eyes - Realistic
04. Let’s draw Manga eyes - Cartoony and realistic hybrid
05. Breaking down a front view of the basic Manga face
06. Breaking down a 3/4 view of the basic Manga face
07. Breaking down a profile view of the basic Manga face
08. Drawing Manga hairstyles for females
09. Drawing more Manga hairstyles for females
10. Drawing Manga hairstyles for males
11. Drawing more Manga hairstyles for males
12. Drawing Manga emotions - Joyful
13. Drawing Manga emotions - Anger
14. Drawing Manga emotions - Sadness
15. Drawing Manga emotions - Boredom

We'll begin this course and process by learning how to establish the overall proportions for a stylistic character and how head size relates to those proportions for the intended age. Following that, we'll explore applying additional features to our proportions sketch. Allowing us to clearly solidify the age of our character design. We will be learning how to age our character, beginning with a toddler age and progressing up through child, teen, adult, and old ages.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Sketching the proportions for our toddler aged character design
03. Adding additional features to our toddler aged proportions sketch
04. Sketching the proportions for our child aged character design
05. Adding additional features to our child aged proportions sketch
06. Sketching the proportions for our teenager character design
07. Adding additional features to our teenager proportions sketch
08. Sketching the proportions for our adult aged character design
09. Adding additional features to our adult aged proportions sketch
10. Sketching the proportions for our old aged character design
11. Adding additional features to our old aged proportions sketch
12. Final character age thoughts and comparisons

Photoshop has long been a pioneer in the realm of 2D image editing. But what happens if we need to incorporate some type of a 3D model into our image? Well with the help of Photoshop CS6 Extended, we now have the ability to handle this entire pipeline all right inside of Photoshop. From materials to lighting and rendering, this tutorial will teach you how to perform each step inside of Photoshop. We’ll get started by learning how to use the Vanishing Point filter to influence our perspective camera. Next we will learn how to import, scale and position all of the geometry for our scene. Next we will break down materials in Photoshop learning how we can quickly assign them to our various pieces of geometry. To wrap this training up, we will learn about different methods of lighting our scene. First we will learn how to implement image based lighting using a linear workflow. We’ll then learn how we can manually create and place lights in our scene to help illuminate our objects in a way that makes them look like they are part of the image. After watching this tutorial, you will be well equipped to begin importing your own geometry into Photoshop and merging it into still images.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Using the vanishing point filter
03. Placing and positioning Geometry
04. Adding materials to geometry - Table
05. Adding materials to geometry - Chairs
06. Adding image based lighting
07. Adjusting materials based on image based lighting
08. Adding additional lights to image based lighting
09. Beginning our manual lighting setup
10. Finishing our manual lighting setup
11. Adding polish to your final render

In this tutorial we will learn how to use some of Photoshop's more basic but powerful tools to create a colorful abstract design. Throughout the lessons in this tutorial we will learn ways to combine some of Photoshop's tools such as the Pen and Brush Tools to create shapes that have depth and dimension. We will also be experimenting with Airbrushing Techniques, Blending Modes, Lighting Effects, and learning several keyboard shortcuts along the way that are sure to speed up your workflow. We will also learn how to seamlessly integrate a photograph into our composition and blend it with its surroundings by implementing non-destructive Adjustment Layers.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Hands-on overview of basic techniques
03. Building our composition
04. Adding variety to the shapes
05. Creating a focal point
06. Comparing Smart Objects and raster images
07. Continuing to build the composition
08. Adding more variation
09. Inserting some lighting effects
10. Adding more details
11. Adding color variation
12. Finishing touches

By using the methods and techniques in this tutorial, you'll be able to digitally illustrate and push the creativity of your own clouds. We'll begin by examining an image of the type of clouds that we want to draw our inspiration from followed drawing the outlines of our own cloud formation. Following this we'll roughly block in a base mid-tone, shadows, and highlights for our cloud. From here we'll demonstrate a how we can blend our blocked in colors to establish the various formations of our cloud. Along the way we'll explore pushing our highlights and shadows, painting smaller formations for added detail, softening up cloud formation edges and weaving our cloud into the atmosphere. Furthermore, we'll learn how we can add additional colors to reflect some warm sunlight using some blend modes. Finally, we'll finish our cloud formation by using a natural bristle brush combined with the smudge tool to add natural looking wisps to our clouds.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Outlining our clouds
03. Blocking in a mid-tone, shadows and highlights
04. Blending and building the formations of our clouds
05. Continuing to blend and build form
06. Pushing overall shadows and highlights
07. Painting smaller cloud formations
08. Softening cloud edges and adjusting atmosphere
09. Adding additional colors for sunlight
10. Adding wisps to our clouds
11. Final Touches

In this Photoshop tutorial we will learn how to process our photography using Adobe Camera Raw in Photoshop. Throughout these lessons we will extensively cover the tools and techniques we can use on our raw images to process them into a final product. Along the way we will look at how these tools are utilized to drive more fundamental concepts such as composition and color theory. The tutorial will primarily aim to address any issues that commonly occur with images, then applying our desired look or grade before outputting our final results. By the end of this training you will have a greater understanding of the post production process of raw images and will help inform you about what you should be looking out for next time you wish to take a photograph.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Raw theory
03. Working with raw files
04. Overview of the Camera Raw interface
05. Cropping and Straightening tools
06. Basic correction controls
07. White Balance tool and the tone curve
08. Point tone curve controls
09. Using the Spot Removal tool
10. Removing lens artifacts
11. Improving sharpness and reducing noise
12. Using local corrections for composition
13. Creative use for the Graduated Filter tool
14. HSL color control
15. Using the targeted Adjustment tool
16. Creating color washes
17. Adding post effects options
18. Case Study - Improving lighting
19. Case Study - Exposure balance and recoloring
20. Case Study - Dealing with underexposure
21. Reusing corrections
22. Saving out our final images

In this tutorial we will go through the character design process as well as go over various painting techniques. During the course of this tutorial, we will go over the sketch and design process for creating NPCs (Non-Player Characters). We will take, from beginning to end, the entire process of creating a Goblin minion that could be handed off to an art team to move into further development. We'll create several armor sets for the goblin to wear. Finally we will take one of those designs to a finished color render. Throughout the tutorial we'll discuss painting techniques, Photoshop hot keys, Wacom tablet settings, and file structuring.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Photoshop hotkeys and tablet settings
03. Sketching out different poses and shapes
04. Setting the goblin base pose
05. Base painting process
06. Base painting detailing
07. Base painting details - Continued
08. Sketching out costumes
09. Beginning the first armor set
10. Detailing the first armor set
11. Finishing the first armor set (Part 1)
12. Finishing the first armor set (Part 2)
13. Beginning the second armor set
14. Detailing the second armor set
15. Continuing to detail the second armor set
16. Finishing the second armor set
17. File organization
18. Painting in some color
19. Preparing the image for final render
20. Painting the skin of the goblin
21. Painting the accessories
22. Continuing to paint the accessories
23. Painting the face of goblin
24. Edge clean-up of our image
25. Applying the finishing touches

We'll begin this process by examining our original photo and walking through some specific steps to prepare it before blocking in any photographic elements or textures. Following this we'll examine an image of some flames and explore how we can weave various parts of these flames into our photo using free transform and layer masks in photoshop. From there we'll also examine and adjust a texture that we plan to clone onto our photo to create the illusion of molten cracked skin. Finally, we'll finish by painting in some final details with our brush tool and make our image pop by adjusting it with an adjustment layer. By utilizing the methods and techniques in this course, you'll be able to push your own photo manipulation projects involving fire to a whole new creative level while having a lot of fun.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Examining and preparing our photo
03. Applying a base color to our female subject
04. Blocking in flames on the hair
05. Layering in additional flames
06. Blending flames using layer masks
07. Adding texture for lava like cracks on the skin
08. Adding flames to the body
09. Creating the illusion of radiating heat
10. Painting melting areas of necklace
11. Adding flying sparks
12. Painting floating sparks
13. Painting additional details onto the body
14. Painting additional details onto the flames
15. Final adjustments to our image

In this tutorial, we'll learn how you can start, or add new techniques, to create detailed human-figure drawings. We'll begin this process by introducing a photo of the model we'll be drawing from and learn how we can establish the overall pose with basic lines of action. Following this we'll explore capturing the model's form through different gesture drawing exercises. From here we'll break down one of our gesture drawings into a series of simple shapes to create an armature to draw our contour lines around and refine the form's shape and proportion. Following this we'll begin to map the prominent shadows and add volume to the form by building up our values. Finally we'll spend some time blending values and refining the overall form of our figure drawing.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Discovering lines of action
03. Capturing the form through gesture drawing
04. Visualizing the figure three dimensionally with wrap around line gestures
05. Visualizing weight and mass through gesture drawing
06. Breaking down the figure into shapes
07. Sketching contour lines over our posed shapes
08. Mapping the shadows
09. Building up the figure with core shadow shading
10. Blocking in mid-tone values and highlights on our figure
11. Blending values and refining the form
12. Continuing to blend values and refine the form

In this tutorial we will cover steps and a creative workflow to create a fantasy character for video games or movies. Throughout the training, you'll see how to create fast textures and color for the character, and see the whole process involved in character creation.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Silhoutte creation process
03. Refining the silhoutte and starting the armor
04. Continuing with the armor design
05. Defining details and separating the pieces of the armor
06. Refining the armor pieces
07. Adding color to the armor pieces
08. Continuing to refine the armor pieces
09. Finishing the armor pieces
10. Starting the detail process
11. Finishing the character with custom brushes

In this tutorial we will cover multiple techniques that artists can use to create environment thumbnails. For concept artists, it is important to be able to quickly come up with numerous ideas. In addition, you also need those ideas to be strong and creative as well. In these lessons we will cover different techniques to jump-start creativity and increase work speed.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Purpose of thumbnails and Photoshop work space
03. The why and how of completing a study first
04. Completing study for reference
05. Creating a thumbnail series from scratch
06. Creating another thumbnail series from scratch
07. Time-lapse observation of final thumbnails
08. Creating a thumbnail series from a photo
09. Creating another thumbnail series from a photo
10. Time-lapse observation of thumbnails from photos
11. Using simple techniques to add points of interest
12. Creating a thumbnail series using kit bashing
13. Creating another thumbnail series using kit bashing
14. Time-lapse observation of final thumbnails using kit bashing
15. Overview and wrap-up

By gaining a better understanding of how we can translate lines to forms, you'll be able to breath added-life into your own drawings and sketches. We'll begin this process by examining what defines a line, shape, and form. From there we'll explore how we can use contour lines and cross contour lines to add more dimension to a flat object. Following this, we'll learn about line weights and how we can apply them to add volume. Along the way we'll also explore how we can capture action and movement by drawing continual gesture lines. In addition we'll focus on rendering a human skull where we'll learn how to add value with hatching and cross hatching lines. Finally we'll finish with learning how to establish an implied line to differentiate form and space.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Defining line and form
03. Visualizing objects through contour drawing
04. Drawing with line weights
05. Establishing form through line gestures
06. Drawing contour lines on top of our line gesture
07. Creating value through hatching lines
08. Building up values and adding texture through cross hatching
09. Cross contour hatching on our skull
10. Creating an implied line around our skull

We'll begin this course by learning about some of the basic features of the video portion of the timeline panel where we'll learn how to import video clips and do some basic editing. From there we'll spend the next several lessons focusing on other visual editing techniques such as using adjustment layers, smart filters, key frames, layer masks and animating with layer styles. We'll also take some time to navigate the frame animation portion of the timeline panel in which we'll explore animating some mouth expressions. Finally we'll cover the timeline's export settings and how to fix possible broken file links. By utilizing the features that the Photoshop timeline has to offer, you'll be able to add a lot of fun and creativity into your own video or animation projects.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Editing video in the video timeline
03. Applying adjustment layers and smart filters with the video time line panel
04. Animating with key frames in the video timeline
05. Applying a layer mask to our video project
06. Animating with layer styles in the video timeline
07. Animating in the frame animation timeline
09. Fixing broken project links

In today’s digital world, to think about a logo only in terms of it’s usage in print is a huge mistake. A logo appears in so many different places, most of which are digital in nature. We’ll get started by learning how to take our vector logo and convert it into extruded 3D objects in Photoshop. To improve it’s visual aesthetic in 3D space, we’ll also learn about things like materials and textures followed by lighting. Next, we will drop our 3D logo onto Photoshop’s timeline and create a simple animation for it. To wrap things up, we’ll learn how to export our final rendered video out of Photoshop. After completing this tutorial, you’ll be familiar with the tools and techniques used to create a stunning logo animation all right inside of Photoshop.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Bringing in the Illustrator logo and extruding it
03. Aligning and orienting the two pieces of our logo
04. Adding a bevel to the extruded faces of our logo
05. Modifying the materials for our logo
06. Creating a ground plane to catch shadows and reflections
07. Adding and editing lighting for our scene
08. Creating a video timeline and adding keyframes
09. Exporting a rendered video

Photoshop has long been the king when it comes to editing 2D images. In fact, many 3D artists have come to use it as their primary application for painting texture maps on their 3D assets. With the introduction of Photoshop CS6 Extended and it’s new Mercury graphics engine and enhanced 3D tools, painting textures for 3D assets in Photoshop has never been easier. In this tutorial, we explore texturing a 3D asset from start to finish primarily in Photoshop’s 3D space. We’ll not only explore different methods of working but we’ll also learn about tools and techniques that will help make you successful immediately. You will be surprised at how well your 2D painting skills translate into 3D space using the tools in Photoshop that you already know. By the end of this Photoshop training, we will have created texture maps for diffuse, bump and specular data for our model.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Setting up our model for painting
03. Adjusting lighting so it is painter friendly
04. Painting base diffuse colors - Laying down initial paint
05. Painting base diffuse colors - Blocking in a base skin texture
06. Painting base diffuse colors - Adding contrast to the face
07. Painting base diffuse colors - Detailing around the eyes
08. Painting base diffuse colors - Cracks and crevices
09. Painting base diffuse colors - Adding a texture to the eyes
10. Painting base diffuse colors - Adding markings to the back and head
11. Mirroring details from one side of the head to the other
12. Painting a bump map
13. Creating specular maps
14. Saving maps out of Photoshop

In this tutorial we learn how to create an automotive render and composite it in Photoshop, VirtualRig, and KeyShot. Throughout these lessons we look at the various pieces it takes to build an automotive render. This covers adding realistic motion blur to a static backplate and utilizing the speed of KeyShot with HDR Light Studio to create the renders necessary for the final composite in Photoshop.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Blurring the backplate in VirtualRig Studio
03. Blurring the HDR to match the backplate
04. Introducing KeyShot and starting a new scene
05. Lighting the car
06. Setting up renders in KeyShot
07. Layering the renders in Photoshop
08. Changing blending modes of various renders
09. Color adjustments and additional renders
10. Adding car shading layers
11. Final adjustments to our image

We'll begin this training by starting with a sketch of our forest creature, along with visualizing the environment that our concept exists in. From there, we'll spend several lessons using some different methods of blocking in textures to develop and evolve the look of our forest creature. As we apply our textures we'll be working in grayscale so that we can focus on maintaining our values first. Once our textures have been blocked in, we'll begin to refine our concept and learn how to apply color. We'll finish our concept by exploring how to place our forest creature into an environment that compliments his appearance. By utilizing the methods of applying textures in this course you'll be able to add more depth and personality to your own concepts.

$30

Content:

Chapters
01. Introduction and project overview
02. Adding a base skin texture to our sketch
03. Texturing the horns of our forest creature
04. Adding patches of bark texture to our forest creature
05. Painting moss textures onto our forest creature
06. Adding rock textures and forms to our forest creature concept
07. Texturing the eyes of our forest creature concept
08. Texturing the mouth interior of our forest creature
09. Refining our blocked in textures
10. Continue to refine our grayscale textured forest creature
11. Blocking in color
12. Continuing to apply color to our concept
13. Refining our forest creature concept with some final details
14. Setting our forest character into a scene
15. Adjusting the depth of field of our concept

In this Beauty Retouching Course, I will show you my complete retouching workflow from A to Z. We will cover, over 90 mintues of pure beauty retouching, in 7 chapters and 22 Video Lessons. I will convey the basic knowledge of beauty retouching in the first chapters. Continuing with advanced skin retouching techniques, light control, dodge & burn, visual make-up and final touch-ups, which are displayed in the last chapters.

$30

Content:

Preparations - Raw Conversions | Double raw conversions | Workflow & help layers " Notes " | Working with layers and groups
Basic retouching - Facial Expression - Optimizing " Liquifying tool " | Retouching tools - Healing & Cloning tools | Basic - skin retouching techniques | Retouching Fine tune " Hair & Eyes "
Skin Retouching - Advanced skin retouching part 1 & 2 | Applying new skin | Working with - Creative filters and masks | Working with - Adjustment layers
Painting with light - Working with dodge & burn tools | Working with dodge & burn techniques | Skin Corrections & Fine tune
Virtual Make-up - Lighten up eyes | Applying make-up | Applying lipgloss
Final Touch-up - Beauty effect with creative filters | High key effect with Extra Plugins | Final touchup & Control

In this Beauty Retouching Course, I will show you my complete retouching workflow from A to Z. We will cover, over 4,5 hours of pure beauty retouching, in 7 chapters and 24 Video Lessons.

$30

Content:

SECTION 1: TRAINING OVERVIEW & INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2: PHOTOGRAPHY & LIGHT SETUP
SECTION 3: PREPARATION BRIDGE & CAMERA RAW
SECTION 4: BASIC RETOUCHING
SECTION 5: ADVANCED RETOUCHING
SECTION 6: FINAL ADJUSTMENTS & CORRECTIONS
SECTION 7: COURSE MATERIALS - RAW & PSD FILES

Photoshop is more than just an image editing application — it is a foundational staple in all the visual arts, from print design, to photography, to web design, to motion graphics and 3D graphics. In this course, award-winning video trainer and Adobe Certified Instructor Chad Perkins will show you the basics of Photoshop. You’ll learn about the components of visual images, making selections, color correcting, fixing images, outputting images, and much more. This course uses Photoshop CS6, but the information presented is applicable to all versions of the application.

$30

Content:

Introduction to Photoshop
  1. Introduction/Overview
Getting Images Into Photoshop
  1. Importing Images from a Camera
  2. Using Adobe Bridge
  3. Using Camera Raw
  4. Opening Images in Photoshop
Photoshop Basics
  1. Creating New Documents
  2. Interface Overview
  3. Navigating Documents
  4. Working with Layers
  5. Straightening Images
  6. Cropping Images
  7. Performing Basic Transformations
  8. Moving and Aligning Objects
Image Basics
  1. Understanding Pixels
  2. Understanding Resolution
  3. Saving Your Work
Color Correction
  1. Understanding Color Modes
  2. Using Adjustment Layers
  3. Fixing Problems Automatically
  4. Reading a Histogram
  5. Adjusting Exposure (Brightness)
  6. Adjusting Colors Selectively
Making Selections
  1. Intro to Selecting
  2. Making Quick Selections
  3. Refining Selections
  4. Making a Collage
Fixing Image Problems
  1. Removing Small Problems
  2. Fixing Bigger Problems
  3. Intelligently Scaling an Object
Working with Effects
  1. Creating Smart Objects
  2. Applying Effects
  3. Adjusting Applied Effects
Working with Text
  1. Creating Text
  2. Editing Text
  3. Using Layer Styles
  4. Creating Graphic Design Elements
Making Art
  1. Painting
  2. Customizing Brushes
  3. Creating Vector Shapes
Exporting and Printing
  1. Understanding File Formats
  2. Saving for the Web
  3. Printing from Photoshop

Once you’ve learned the basics of Photoshop, you’ll probably start looking for ways to exercise really precise control over the adjustments you make to your images. In this unique workshop, Tim Grey takes an in-depth look at working with selections and layer masks to create targeted adjustments. After covering the key concepts behind selections and exploring Photoshop’s selection tools, Tim delves into a variety of advanced techniques that will help you make accurate selections, create seamless composite images, and apply adjustments that do exactly what you want them to do. This workshop places a special emphasis on mixing and matching different tools and techniques to unleash the full power of what Photoshop can do for you.

$30

Content:

Basic Concepts
27:51
Selections, Alpha Channels, and Layer Masks, Oh My!
06:18
Anti-Aliasing and Selections
02:24
The Case for NOT Feathering Selections
04:41
Adding, Subtracting, and Intersecting
02:55
Inverting a Selection
02:06
Mixing and Matching Selection Tools
02:10
Using Deselect, Reselect, and Hide
02:12
Saving and Loading Selections
05:05
Selection Tools
45:22
The Rectangular Marquee Tool
08:04
The Elliptical Marquee Tool
07:06
The Lasso Tool
05:32
The Polygonal Lasso Tool
05:49
The Magnetic Lasso Tool
07:03
The Quick Selection Tool
04:30
The Magic Wand Tool
07:18
Advanced Selection Techniques
40:31
Selecting the Border of an Existing Selection
02:35
The Color Range Command
07:10
Reducing the Range of a Color Range Selection
03:39
Selecting Faces with the Color Range Tool
02:46
The Pen Tool
04:33
Selecting by Luminosity
05:20
Selecting from a Channel
03:52
Transforming a Selection
04:53
Quick Mask Mode
05:43
Creating Composite Images
66:41
Using Bridge to Layer Images Automatically
02:16
Layering Images Manually
02:24
Painting to Hide and Reveal
06:30
Creating a Selection-Based Composite
03:03
Creating an Edge-Fade Effect
03:22
Blurring a Background
03:51
Using a Filter to Add an Artistic Edge
08:10
Using a Brush Effect to Add an Artistic Edge
07:14
Transforming a Masked Object
04:52
Unlinking Image and Mask
05:02
Matching Composite Images
04:45
Adding Layer Effects with Masks
07:03
Reviewing Layer Masks
04:22
Select, Then Paint
03:47
Applying Targeted Adjustments
51:41
Painting an Adjustment
05:18
Shades of Gray
04:32
Using the Gradient Tool
05:51
Selecting and Adjusting Areas of a Photo
03:05
Creating a Vignette Effect with Masking
03:45
Using a Layer Group
04:37
Working with Multiple Masks
06:16
Refining an Adjustment Mask
09:43
Advanced Mask Cleanup
08:34

In this advanced workshop Tim Grey delves into some of the finer points of creating top-quality output of your digital images. You’ll get an introduction to color management, which is absolutely crucial to maintaining consistent colors throughout your workflow. Tim takes an in-depth look at the topic of sharpening — when and how to do it, as well as when not to — and covers some advanced sharpening techniques. He also offers tips for printing your photos, exploring both the relevant settings in Photoshop and those you’re likely to find in your printer driver. Finally, he discusses troubleshooting suboptimal output — i.e., when something goes wrong, figuring out what happened and how to fix it. If you spend a lot of time optimizing your images, this workshop will help you make sure all that effort is reflected in the quality of your output.

$30

Content:

Getting Started with Color Management
38:30
Consistent, Predictable, and Hopefully Accurate Color
02:32
Monitor Calibration
06:39
Color Settings
08:39
Designating Color Space in RAW Conversion
04:09
Assigning a Profile
04:55
Converting to a Profile
03:05
Dealing with Profile Mismatches
03:24
Gamut Considerations
02:24
Printer Profiles
02:43
Early-Workflow Sharpening
10:17
In-Camera Sharpening
02:28
Sharpening in Adobe Camera Raw
05:24
Output Sharpening in Adobe Camera Raw
02:25
Output Preparation
48:55
Saving the Master Image
03:58
Basic Output Workflow
06:12
Sharpening with Smart Sharpen
08:41
Sharpening with Unsharp Mask
04:05
When Not to Sharpen
01:43
Local Contrast Enhancement
03:26
Saving the Image for Digital Sharing
06:08
Soft Proofing for Print
07:21
CMYK Conversions
03:16
Saving the Final Print Image
03:55
Advanced Sharpening Techniques
16:41
Sharpening with Smart Filters
02:16
Creative Sharpening
01:52
Sharpening Just the Edges
05:12
Targeted Sharpening
03:23
Avoiding Color Shifts
03:58
Printing a Photo
8:28
Printing from Photoshop
05:40
Addressing a Print Mismatch
02:48

No matter how careful you are when capturing your photographic images, there are going to be issues that you find later — whether it’s little spots or blemishes, or bigger problems like color casts or chromatic aberration. In this workshop, Tim Grey shares his techniques for cleaning up your images with Photoshop. After getting an overview of image-cleanup concepts and tools, you’ll learn how to remove spots, correct color problems, eliminate noise, fix red eye, and much more. Tim also shares advanced techniques like making gradient adjustments, extending the frame, and using multiple exposures to remove people from an image. After completing this workshop, you’ll know how to remove distractions in an image that keep your genius from shining through.

$30

Content:

Cleanup Concepts
20:19
The Ethics of Cleanup
03:02
Reviewing the Image
04:33
Adjusting for Review
02:51
Nondestructive Cleanup
04:18
Brush Hardness Considerations
05:35
Cleanup Tools
43:11
Crop Tool Cleanup
03:00
Straightening a Crooked Image
03:32
Correcting Perspective
07:40
The Clone Stamp Tool
09:45
The Healing Brush Tool
03:41
The Spot Healing Brush Tool
02:38
The Patch Tool
05:21
Content-Aware Fill
03:02
The Content-Aware Move Tool
04:52
Cleanup Techniques
36:30
Basic Spotting
06:01
Correcting Color Contamination
03:17
Brightening and Whitening
06:10
Red Eye Removal
03:53
Mixing and Matching Cleanup Tools
04:02
Toning Down Rather than Removing
03:21
Fixing Chromatic Aberration
03:30
Reducing Noise
06:16
Advanced Cleanup Techniques
32:16
Removing Strong Color Casts
03:17
Adjusting Brush Shape
03:38
Gradient Adjustments
05:01
Pen Tool Cleanup
04:56
Manual Patching
05:36
Extending the Frame
04:28
Using Multiple Exposures to Remove Subjects from an Image
05:20

The core strength of Photoshop is the way it enables you to improve the quality of your images, whether you’re fixing a major problem or making a subtle adjustment. In this workshop Tim Grey explores a wide variety of techniques to help you get the best results when optimizing your images. He begins with basics like cropping, changing brightness and contrast, and correcting color balance, then moves on to more advanced adjustments like Shadows/Highlights, Curves, and dodging and burning. You’ll learn how to make targeted adjustments that affect only selected parts of the image and apply creative adjustments that don’t so much fix a problem as add a unique touch. And best of all, Tim teaches all these techniques as part of an overall workflow designed to help you work quickly, efficiently, and nondestructively.

$30

Content:

Getting Started
33:31
Configuring the Photoshop Interface
04:55
Opening an Existing Image
02:25
Basic RAW Conversion
09:50
Introduction to Adjustment Layers
03:12
Reviewing Adjustments
05:13
A Basic Adjustment Workflow
02:05
Saving the Master Image
05:51
Basic Adjustments
36:50
Cropping the Image
06:32
Improving Tonality with Brightness/Contrast
02:42
Refining Tonality with Levels
06:14
Correcting Color with Color Balance
05:18
Boosting Colors with Vibrance
04:02
Refining Colors with Hue/Saturation
07:45
Adding a Tint with the Photo Filter
04:17
Advanced Adjustments
44:12
Using the Shadows/Highlights Adjustment
06:42
Dodging and Burning
08:45
Introduction to Curves
08:18
Tonal Adjustments with Curves
08:10
Color Adjustments with Curves
03:59
Basic Targeted Adjustments
04:29
Making a Targeted Adjustment from a Selection
03:49
Creative Adjustments
26:16
Creating a Black-and-White Interpretation of a Color Photo
03:44
Adding a Tint to a Black-and-White Image
02:54
Using a Gradient Map
07:23
Adding a Vignette
03:49
Adding an HDR Toning Effect
06:04
Getting Creative with Curves
02:22

What can you do with Adobe Photoshop CS6? Not just everything Photoshop is famous for, like editing and optimizing images, but lots of new things like video editing and creating 3D text and objects. In this Learn by Video course (created in partnership with our friends at Peachpit Press), Adobe Certified Expert Kelly McCathran covers every aspect of working in Photoshop CS6, from basic concepts to advanced techniques. You also get lots of hands-on exercises and projects to help you learn to get the most from Photoshop’s myriad tools and effects.

$30

Content:

Introducing Photoshop CS6
  1. Introduction 01:50
  2. How to Launch the Files and Lessons 02:58
  3. What Is Photoshop: Raster vs. Vector 04:58
  4. What's New in Photoshop CS6 (Overview) 10:42
  5. The Photoshop Family 08:13
  6. Touring the Interface and Managing Document Windows 07:11
  7. The Window > Application Frame (Mac Only) 03:03
  8. Zooming and Navigating 06:27
  9. Advanced Zooming and Navigating 08:48
  10. Creating, Opening, Editing, and Saving 11:23

Photoshop Project Explorations
  1. Using Multiple Undos and the History Brush Tool 05:56
  2. Redesigned Mini Bridge 06:23
  3. Adobe Bridge and Batch Renaming 10:15
  4. Removing Unwanted Objects with Content-Aware Fill 03:53
  5. Content-Aware Move, Patch, and History Brush Tools 10:43
  6. Plug-ins a.k.a. Filters/Up in Smoke 10:32
  7. Automatic Color Correction 06:37
  8. Flawless Faces: Women 09:35
  9. Flawless Faces: Men 08:52
  10. Cropping and Straightening an Image 07:01
  11. Content-Aware Scaling 05:39
  12. Making Selections 08:12

Customizing Photoshop
  1. Under the Hood: New Auto Recovery, Customizing the Interface, and Hidden Plug-ins (Filters) 08:34
  2. Arranging Panels, Switching Screen Modes, and Saving a Custom Workspace 08:39
  3. Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts 06:04
  4. Customizing Photoshop's Menus 03:25
  5. Optimizing Photoshop's Performance: GPU, CPU, RAM, VRAM and More 13:32
  6. Rulers, Guides, and Grids 07:46

Image Editing Concepts
  1. Resolution, File Size, and Compression 10:28
  2. RGB vs. CMYK 09:08
  3. Importing Camera Images 06:13
  4. Reviewing and Rating Images 07:23
  5. Organizing Your Image Library 11:01
  6. Nondestructive Editing 07:16
  7. Selections: Rectangular and Elliptical 08:10
  8. Selections: The Lasso and Polygonal Lasso Tools 09:09
  9. Selections: The Magic Wand Tool 06:25
  10. Selections: The Quick Selection Tool and Refine Edge 05:57
  11. Using Refine Edge for Image Extraction 06:40
  12. Converting to Black-and-White 06:49

Layers and Masks
  1. Removing Solid Backgrounds 05:37
  2. Overview of Layers 09:05
  3. Adding New Layers 09:21
  4. Merging Two Images for One Perfect Shot 07:45
  5. Layer Masks, the Key to Flawless Retouching 05:18
  6. Creating Special Effects with Layer Masks 06:28
  7. Correcting Color and Contrast Using a Layer Mask 07:35
  8. Using Layer Styles 08:53
  9. Changing Colors Using Layers 11:54

Photo Retouching
  1. Removing Red-Eye 08:09
  2. Skin Perfection, Eye Brightening, and Double-Chin Removal 11:36
  3. Creating "Hollywood" Skin 13:01
  4. Realistic Retouching Using the History Panel 09:41
  5. Dodging and Burning to Draw Attention 09:26
  6. Differences in the Primary Retouching Tools 06:02
  7. Repairing Skin to New Layers 09:04
  8. Did the Makeup Artist Go Too Far? 09:14
  9. Drop 10 Pounds Without Dieting Using the Liquify Tool 11:15

Creating Beautiful Digital Images with Adobe Camera Raw
  1. What Is Adobe Camera Raw and What Files Can It Correct? 14:11
  2. Reading a Histogram and Using the Info Panel 10:13
  3. Reading and Applying Metadata 09:20
  4. Creating Metadata Templates 08:35
  5. Removing Color Casts and Improving Contrast With ACR 07:25
  6. Correcting a Series of Photos and the Image Processor 08:19
  7. Cropping in Adobe Camera Raw 05:40
  8. Boosting Color With Adobe Camera Raw 04:48
  9. Selective Color in Adobe Camera Raw 08:22
  10. Painting in Corrections with the Adjustment Brush 07:26
  11. Using the Targeted Adjustment Tool 08:52

Working with Type and Creating Mock-Ups
  1. Typography in Photoshop 10:04
  2. The Character Panel 08:15
  3. The Paragraph Panel 08:19
  4. Creating and Sharing Paragraph Styles 07:26
  5. Character Styles 08:41
  6. Creating Mobile Buttons 10:44
  7. The Coolest Keyboard Shortcuts for Formatting Text 08:37
  8. Using Guides and Layer Groups to Perfect the Layout 09:52
  9. Advanced Blending Options for Type 05:09

3D and Video Editing
  1. Making Text 3D 09:54
  2. Creating a 3D Object 06:56
  3. Creating a 3D Title Sequence 06:18
  4. Video Editing in Photoshop 11:33
  5. Adding Video Transitions 07:14

Just for Fun
  1. The "Tourist & Car" Remover 08:39
  2. Creating Seamless Panoramic Images 08:14
  3. "Cropiddy" Crop, Crop, Crop 11:56
  4. Cropping to Ratios, Fixed Sizes, and Resolution 09:40
  5. Perspective Crop Tool 04:28
  6. Adaptive Wide Angle Correction 07:35
  7. Blurring for Focus or Optical Illusion 07:05
  8. Cool Lighting Effects 09:44
  9. Warping Images 07:38
  10. Puppet Warp 06:20
  11. The Clone Stamp Tool 09:01
  12. Merging High Dynamic Range Images 06:01
  13. Vanishing Point 06:08
  14. Using Blending Modes and Adding a Mask 02:47

Outputting Your Images
  1. Building a Web Photo Gallery 08:09
  2. Creating a Contact Sheet 07:08
  3. Saving Images for the Web 09:56
  4. Color Settings 14:39
  5. Preparing Press-Quality Images 08:08
  6. Printing Images 04:42

Artistic Expression and Special Effects
  1. Turn Your Photo Into a Work of Art with Oil Paint 03:36
  2. Creating Hand-Painted Artwork from a Photo with the Mixer Brush 08:42
  3. Using Adobe Camera Raw for Painterly Effects 09:42
  4. Creating Abstract Artwork with the Art History Brush 06:14
  5. Using Actions for Special Effects 04:51
  6. Record Your Hand-Drawn Painting 09:03
  7. Create a Cartoon Avatar Using the Filter Gallery 08:36
  8. Creating and Applying Patterns 03:40

Closing Thoughts
  • Closing Thoughts 04:48

Chances are, when you think of Photoshop, working with text isn’t the first thing you think of. And yet Photoshop offers powerful tools for creating and customizing text. In this course Tim Grey explores all the possibilities – from basic tools and techniques for adding and formatting text to advanced options like presets, styles, layer effects, and text on a path. You’ll also learn how to fine-tune the text you’ve added to an image, get tips for creative things you can do with words and letters in Photoshop, and be introduced to some of the new features in Photoshop CS6 that make working with text surprisingly easy and efficient.

$30

Content:

• Getting Started with Text
• What Is Text?
03:55
• Type Tool Basics
03:60
• Editing and Moving Text
02:34
• Basic Text Appearance
• Basic Text Attributes
05:03
• Hiding Text Selection
02:26
• Character and Paragraph Panels Overview
02:57
• Basic Text Alignment
02:43
• Positioning Text with Guides
03:43
• Using Spell-Check
03:23
• Advanced Text Appearance
• Kerning and Tracking
04:20
• Vertical and Horizontal Scale
03:52
• Baseline Shift
02:06
• Character Attributes
03:14
• Ligatures and More
03:23
• Aligning Text
• Paragraph Alignment
02:53
• Margins and Indentation
04:31
• Hyphenation
02:24
• Aligning Multiple Text Layers
05:12
• Advanced Text Options
• Type Tool Presets
01:39
• Paragraph and Character Styles
06:27
• Transforming Text
03:35
• Adding Layer Effects
06:04
• Adjusting Opacity
04:17
• Putting an Image Inside Text
04:11
• Putting Text on a Path
03:12

Bridge CS6 is a powerful program that’s installed alongside many Adobe Creative Suite programs. This program serves as the file monitor and home base for many different types of programs. RC Concepcion goes over how easy it is to find, open, and organize yourself in Bridge CS6.

$30

Content:

 Introduction (01:07)

Navigating the Bridge Interface (04:21)

Viewing Images in Bridge (05:27)

Organizing and Sorting Your Files (06:50)

Importing Media and Making Folders (05:00)

Navigating Through Folders and the Address Bar (06:25)

Creating Collections (04:15)

Keywording Your Media (03:55)

Metadata for your Files (05:24)

Bridge CS6, Camera Raw, and Photoshop (05:36)

PDF Output in Bridge CS6 (05:37)

HTML Output in Bridge CS6 (04:36)

Using Mini Bridge in Photoshop CS6 (02:04)

Conclusion (00:26)

Explore and exciting wave of possibilities with the newly enhanced 3D features in Photoshop CS6 Extended. With these new performance enhancements, implementing 3D into your design work has never been easier or more fun! Join Corey as he shows you how to hit the ground running with these newly enhanced and intuitive features. If you haven’t started experimenting with 3D yet, now is the time!

$30

Content:

 Introduction (01:22)
Creating a 3D Object (11:42)
Importing 3D (05:57)
Understanding the 3D Space (12:11) this lesson.
3D & Properties Panels (09:17)
Extruding & Modifying Custom Shapes (08:11)
Editbale 3D Text (08:10)
Revolving A 3D Object (07:23)Check it out!
Merging 3D Objects (07:14)
Texture & Surface Properties 1 (11:13)
Texture & Surface Properties 2 (10:01)
3D Lighting 1 (11:02)
3D Lighting 2 (08:42)
Putting it all Together (11:06)
Conclusion (00:54)

Photographers have recently started experimenting with creating video on their DSLR cameras. The only problem with this has been that no one really wants to go out and learn another program to edit and produce this video. Now, in Photoshop CS6 you have the power to make a compelling video with images using a familiar tool. RC Concepcion will take you through, step by step to create an appealing video, right inside of Photoshop.

$30

Content:

Introduction (01:23)
Opening a Movie in Photoshop (04:28)

Trim Extend, Delete, Mute, and Speed (05:34)

Transitions and Adjusting Transtions (06:14)

Adding Music (08:49)

Adding Text and Titles and Background (09:20)

Text and Title Effects (05:55)

Project 2 - DSLR Project (09:35)

DSLR Project : Music, Titling and Text Effects (06:35)

Animating Styles (12:10)

Ken Burns Effects (10:29)

Video and Images (10:53)

Exporting the Video (02:26)

Conclusion (00:26)

Photoshop CS6 has loads of new design features from the way it handles type to new vector layers. Understanding all of the various functions geared towards the designer will allow you to become more creative and effective. In this class, Pete Collins, co-host of PhotoshopUserTV, will provide in depth tips and tricks on all of the ways CS6 can make your life much easier.

$30

Content:

1. Introduction (00:58)
Welcome to an overview of the new design features in Photoshop CS6
2. Blur gallery part 1:Field blur and Iris blur (04:07)
In the first of two lessons, we will look at Field blur and Iris blus and how they can enhance your designs.
3. Blur gallery part 2:Tilt shift and blur effects (05:20)
In the second of two lessons we will see how to incorporate Tilt-shift and Blur effects into our design workflow.
4. Brushes part 1: Static, Bristle and Airbrushes (04:54)
We will look at three of the brush types in CS6 and show how each one works.
5. Brushes part 2: Erodible and Mixer (05:04)
Starting with the brand new Erodible brushes and then highlighting the mixer brush features, we will look at how these can be used to create brand new looks for your designs.
6. 3D overview (04:08)
3D is now faster and easier to use… and we will take a quick look at how it is no longer scary to work with.
7. Lighting Effects (04:32)
Lighting Effects has ben revived with more power and an easier interface to work with. We will look at how it works and what is its potential.
8. Vector Layers (02:36)
For most designers that use Photoshop, just letting you know that you can make simple dotted and dashed lines easily will make you happy. Pete will show you how easy it is.
9. Oil Paint Filter (03:26)
Once a hidden plug-in, Oil paint has now made it as a real filter. We will look at how it works and I will give you some tips on what it works best on.
10. Text enhancements (04:04)
For the text saavy designer, the ability to add Character and Paragraph styles is going to be a great thing… couple that with better text and font handling and the abiltiy to generate Lorem Ipsum text and this is a winner.
11. Groups and Layer Styles (03:07)
Organizing and being able to make global adjustments to layers and groups is pretty darn handy. We will look at how CS6 makes your work just a little easier.
12. Background and Autosave (03:28)
Autosave… need we say more. This feature alone will save you so much time and frustration. Couple that with background saving of files and you stress level just decreased.
13. Conclusion (00:23)
Thanks for watching. Hope you learned a lot

Photoshop is the program that some have come to know for finishing HDR Images but, more often than not, it’s overlooked as the source of producing great HDR files. RC Concepcion shows you how to create the most compelling HDRs by going through the entire process, start-to-finish, using only Photoshop.

$30

Content:

Introduction (01:00)

HDR Overview - Starting HDR Pro (04:51)

Tonemapping - Radius and Strength (04:14)

Using Gamma, Detail, and Expousre (06:29)

Finishing in Photoshop : 3 Detail Techniques (05:35)

Finishing in Photoshop: Adjustment Layers (04:48)

What is Ghosting? (03:37)

Saving a 32 Bit Image (04:26)

Single Image HDR (04:38)

Double Tonemapping (06:59)

Remixing HDR (05:08)

Clarity as HDR (03:10)

HDR Pano Techniques (06:26)

Conclusion (00:40)

Being able to create artistic images with Photoshop has never been easier with the new brushes and performance delivered in CS6. With the addition of Airbrush and Erodible tips, along with the mixer brush features, you can replicate real world art media and techniques inside of Photoshop. Whether you prefer pastels and oils, or watercolor and cartooning, Pete Collins, co-host of PhotoshopUserTV, will show you how to use the tools and techniques to begin to bring your vision to life.

$30

Content:

1. Introduction (01:11)
Welcome to an in-depth look at the brushes and their role in Photoshop CS6
2. What is in a brush: brush options (06:40)
We will look at the various options and settings that give you so much flexibility when working with brushes.
3. 5 types of brushes (05:47)
What are the different brushes and how do they work. We will give youa quick overview of each brush type to get you started with more in-depth lessons on each brush to follow.
4. Brush styles part 1: Brush tip shape and shape dynamics (05:21)
Being able to modify the characteristics of your brushes to achive the looks you want is such a powerful tool. We will look at the first two major settings in the brush styles panel.
5. Brush styles part 2: Scattering, texture and dual brushes (05:16)
Continuing our look at how to edit brushes, we see how the next three options can dramatically change the look of our brush strokes.
6. Brush styles part 3: The rest of the story (06:01)
This leasson looks at the remaining options that can supercharge your brushes and bend them to your will.
7. Creating brushes (06:36)
Now that we understand how to edit our brushes, we will look at how easy it is to create our own.
8. Making clouds and static (06:40)
Now we will learn how to make big puffy cloud brushes and also discuss the new options for the static brushes.
9. Bristle brushes (05:08)
The first brush that we will look at in-depth… these brushes look and act like artistic paint brushes.
10. Erodible tip brushes (07:03)
New for CS6, these new tips allow you to create more realistic dry media looks such as pastels and charcoal. The ability to have the tips erode as they interact with the canvas is truly wonderful.
11. Airbrushes (03:40)
The second set of brand new tips for CS6… these will look and act just like airbrushing or spray painting. Get ready to be able to make some great new looks and textures.
12. Mixer brushes (08:41)
Although not new, mixer brushes can be daunting, we are going to look at the different settings and how they work, and hopefully inspire you to see what you can do with them.
13. Organizing your brushes (08:22)
Not the most exciting lesson title, but with all the new brushes and options, being able to keep up with and access the right tool at the right time is so important. You will learn how to create and manage brush libraries as well us seeing the potential of brush tool presets.
14. Conclusion (00:26)
Thanks for watching. Hope you learned a lot.

Learn how to automate common processes in Adobe Photoshop from creating actions and batch processing, to creating Droplets. This class will teach you how to use your time more efficiently and leverage some of the new features of Photoshop CS6.

$30

Content:

Introduction (01:05)

Creating an Action (05:38)

Tool Recording (04:25)

Inserting Stop and Conditions in Actions (05:33)

Insert Menu Items (03:20)

Batching an Action (12:14)

Importing an Exporting Actions (03:22)

What Is a Droplet? (06:06)

Creating a Droplet for Lightroom (07:32)

Creating a Translucent Watermark (07:10)

Placing an Image in an Action (10:52)

Installing Script Listener (03:53)

Using ScriptListener to Create a jsx File (03:19)

Running A Javascript Command (06:16)

Conclusion (00:53)

Lesa Snider returns to creativeLIVE for an intensive look at the newly released Adobe Photoshop CS6. Whether you've already upgraded or are still deciding, you'll learn practical yet non-destructive editing techniques you can use every day. This 3-day course is a perfect companion to Lesa's previous CS5 class on creativeLIVE. Lesa will go further in-depth into advanced filters such as Puppet Warp, Liquify, and Lighting Effects, which all take advantage of the new processing power of CS6. Lesa will spend a full day covering Photoshop's brand new video features.

$30

Content:

WELCOME: Day 1 Pre-Show Banter
00:11:07
Introduction and Feature Overview
00:16:17
Interface Changes and the Properties Panel
00:18:58
Auto-Saving and 3rd Party Plugins
00:27:54
The New Crop Tool
00:11:13
Crop Tool Q&A
Rich Cursors and Straightening
00:07:42
Perspective Crop Tool
00:16:35
Auto Levels
00:26:20
Layer Filtering
00:08:18
Layer Tricks
00:27:28
Layer Tricks Example: Limoncello Label
00:37:13
Fills and Strokes in Shape Layers
00:07:00
Shape Layer Q&A
00:41:58
Scripted Patterns
00:19:19
Type Menu
00:14:40
Contact Sheets and PDFs
00:07:52
iStockPhoto Plugin
Session 2 May 23, 2012
17 Videos
WELCOME: Day 2 Pre-Show Banter
00:27:21
Selecting Skin with Color Range
00:18:30
Selecting Skin with Color Range Q&A
00:22:24
Content-Aware Patch
00:16:20
Content-Aware Patch Q&A
00:24:57
Content-Aware Move Tool
00:07:45
Content-Aware Move Q&A
00:21:14
The New Blur Filters
00:13:48
Blur Filters Q&A
00:16:46
Iris Filter
00:17:59
Tilt-Shift Blur Filter
00:09:49
Adaptive Wide Angle Filter
00:23:59
Gradient Map Presets
00:19:01
Lighting Effects Filter
00:44:20
Puppet Warp
00:10:10
Puppet Warp Q&A
00:18:52
Oil Paint Filter and the Eye Dropper
Session 3 May 24, 2012
15 Videos
WELCOME: Day 3 Pre-Show Banter
00:09:36
Getting Video Into Photoshop
00:31:02
The Timeline Panel
00:10:35
Audio
00:15:54
Transitions
00:15:30
Text in Video
00:30:57
Suitman Video Project, Part 1
00:36:24
Suitman Video Project, Part 2
00:13:41
Suitman Video Project, Part 3
00:36:22
Get Your Cape On Video Project, Part 1
00:17:12
Get Your Cape On Video Project, Part 2
00:27:49
Splitting Clips
00:19:29
Applying Filters to Video
00:27:19
Animation
00:06:34
Exporting Video

$30

Content:

• Welcome from Wes
- What to expect from this video--besides expert instruction on the ideal companion for tablet and photoshop users.
• Tablet Overview
- A brief overview of pen tablets and key features.
• The Pen and Tablet
- Understanding what you are working with. Fundamental tablet usage.
• Intro to Multi-touch
- Basic Multi-touch usage and application.
• Basic Training
- No more mousing around! Tips and techniques for getting used to using the pen.
• Wacom Tablet Properties
- An overview of the many ways in which you can customize your tablet for optimal use.
• Application Specific Settings
- How to customize your tablet for specific applications.
• All About the Pen
- Tricking out the pen for your personal taste.
• Pen Calibration from Cintiq Users
- Supplement for Cintiq users - Lining up the cursor with your pen.
• Touch and Gestures
- Incorporating touch input and gestures into your workflow.
• Tablet Functions
- An overview of the various tablet functions.
• ExpressKeys for Intuos
- In-depth look and set up of ExpressKeys for Intuos.
• ExpressKeys for Cintiq
- Supplement for Cintiq users - In-depth look and set up of ExpressKeys for Intuos.
• Touch Ring
- Setting up the Touch Ring on Intuos5 (Applicable to tablets/displays w/ Touch Strips).
• Radial Menu
- Extend your use of ExpressKeys with Radial Menu, a powerful function providing on-screen, context-sensitive commands.
• Display toggle
- Use multiple displays? Maximize your tablets active area with Display Toggle. The Why and How-to use Display Toggle.
• Going Wireless
- Enabling an Intuos5 pen tablet for wireless use.
• Pressure Sensitivity 101
- Enabling brushes and other tools for use with pressure for precise control.
• Wacom Tablet Utility
- Backing up and restoring tablet preferences for safe keeping and other uses.
• Tablet Accessories
- A look at the various accessories available for Wacom's professional pen tablets and interactive pen displays.
• Thanks from Wes
- Wes wraps up, reviews and hands the pen over to Colin.
• Welcome from COLIN
- Welcome to the video and orentation
• Custom Settings
- Colin shows you his personal setup for working with a pen and tablet
• All about Brushes
- Learn all about the brush options in photoshop CS6
• Custom Image Brushes
- Learn to make your own brushes out of images. Also learn how to straighten perspetive to make a brush.
• Color to Black and White
- Learn how to convert an image to Black and White as well as creating localized color effects.
• Depth of Field
- Learn how to simulate a depth of field effect using the Blur Gallery in Photoshop CS6.
• Dodge and Burn
- Use Dodging and Burning to bring out the best in your photos. Learn when, where and how to Dodge and Burn as well as the proper techniques in Photoshop and Camera Raw.
• Paint with Light
- Learn how to use adjustment layers, layer masks and pressure sensitivity to selectively lighten and darken a photo.
• Cutout Photo
- Use the Quick Select brush and enhanced Refine Edge tools in Photoshop CS6. Learn to extract an image from it's background, quickly and cleanly. Then composite it with a realistic cast shadow.
• Retouching
- Use the new retouch tools including Content Aware move and content aware patch in Photoshop CS6 to quickly remove distracting objects from a photo.
• Create Painting from Photo
- Use the Bristle Brushes in CS6 to simulate natural brush strokes. Take a photo and turn it into a painting by using the Mixer Brush.
• Change Nibs
- See how you can change the nibs on your Wacom pen. Use the nib that gives you just the right natural feel on the tablet surface.
• Goodbye
- Parting comments from Colin
• iPad Instructions
- How to load your movies on this disk to iTunes so that you can transfer to your compatible mobile devices.

Photoshop is the most powerful image editing software available today — used by photographers and graphic artists for image enhancement and editing, print and web design, and digital art. Adobe Certified Photoshop Instructor Michael Brown is ready to teach you everything learned over his 25 year career applied to the newest CS6 version of Photoshop. His vast experience in real world photography and imaging gives him the ability to present Photoshop from a practical user's point of view suitable for beginner through advanced students. His course will also guide you through how to professionally edit your images, teach you the basics of creating eye catching graphics designs, and show you how to create and modify impressive videos. Professor Brown is a multiple award-winning commercial photographer and digital artist with over 25 years of real world experience in the advertising industry. He is also an Adobe Certified Photoshop Instructor and has been teaching and training students in Photoshop for over 5 years.

$30

Content:

I. Introduction
Introduction To Photoshop 14:46
The Importance of Quality 17:46
Light & Color 15:27
White Balance and Monitor Calibration 17:34
II. Workspace
The Workspace 20:17
The Tool Bar & Essential Shortcuts 14:16
The Menu Bar 17:00
Setting Preferences 18:36
III. Adobe Bridge
Adobe Bridge Overview 18:13
Importing, Sorting, and Rating 22:22
Getting Organized 13:09
Creating PDF's and Web Photo Galleries 8:49
Adobe Bridge Summary 11:18
IV. Camera RAW
Camera RAW 11:44
Camera RAW, Part 2 22:40
V. Photoshop Basics
Categories 11:28
File Formats 9:37
Image Size, Canvas Size, & Resolution 20:54
Saving Your Images 17:18
Cropping & Straightening 13:59
Brushes 28:03
Sharpening Methods 18:03
Exposure & Color, Part 1 18:43
Exposure & Color, Part 2 26:00
Exposure & Color, Part 3 21:04
Gradients 24:05
The Transform Tools 20:05
Actions 16:17
VI. Selections
Introduction to Selections 24:41
Selection, Part 1 19:32
Selection, Part 2 31:29
Feather 13:24
Refining Selection Edges 31:28
Pen Tool, Part 1 25:33
Pen Tool, Part 2 26:08
Alpha Channels & Calculations 20:07
VII. Layers, Layer Masks, & Composites
Layers & Adjustment Layers 22:10
Layers & Adjustment Layers, Part 2 21:24
Layers & Masks Examples 16:29
Layer Composites, Part 1 26:04
Composites Part 2 24:06
VIII. Retouching
Basic Retouching: Tools & Techniques 28:56
Content Aware Functions 23:10
Retouching People: Part 1 21:33
Retouching People: Part 2 24:25
Retouching People: Part 3 20:28
IX. Filters and Blends
Basic Filters & Blend Modes 18:26
Blur Filters 25:12
The Liquify Filter 16:17
Vanishing Point Filter 18:45
X. Text
Using Text In Photoshop 31:49
Manipulating Text 13:58
More Text Effects 16:31
XI. Cool Features
Colorize and Black & White Conversion 13:16
Panorama 22:06
HDR 20:32
Photo Frame Effect 21:27
Creating & Editing Video 26:19
XII. Course Summary
Course Summary 6:38

As a photographer, you have two options to take photos: JPG and RAW. Regardless of which you choose, you’re going to need a consistent and fast way to color correct, adjust, sharpen and make your photos look their best. Camera Raw is it! Join NAPP Instructor Matt Kloskowski as he walks you through all the buttons, options, and sliders in Camera Raw for Photoshop CS6. At the end of the course you’ll be a master at Camera Raw and you’ll know exactly how to handle any photo you come across.

$30

Content:

Introduction (02:17)
Camera Raw works for Raw and JPEGs (03:56)
A (VERY) Quick Tour of the Camera Raw Interface (03:32)
Choosing A Process Version (03:41)
Setting White Balance (05:37)
Setting Overall Exposure and Tone (06:30)
Adjusting Multiple Photos At One Time (05:01)
Clarity Vibrance and Saturation (04:50)
The Tone Curve (04:59)
Sharpening (05:48)
Noise Reduction (03:50)
Adjusting Colors and Black and White Conversions (04:52)
Split Toning or Tinting Your Photos (01:45)
Lens Corrections (03:58)
Vignetting and Grain (04:22)
Cropping and Straightening (03:43)
Removing Spots (04:40)
The Adjustment Brush (08:08)
Using the Graduated Filter (04:40)
Creating and Saving Presets (03:58)
Creating Snapshots (AKA: Versions) (03:31)
Conclusion (00:33)

 

 

 

Ansys 14.5-16.0 Tutorials & Training Materials $120

 

Content:

AnsoftLinks
ANSYS AIM
ANSYS Aqwa
ANSYS Autodyn
ANSYS BladeModeler
ANSYS CFD
ANSYS CFD-Post
ANSYS CFX
ANSYS Composite PrepPost
ANSYS Customization Suite
ANSYS Designer
ANSYS DesignerRF
ANSYS DesignerSI
ANSYS DesignModeler
ANSYS DesignXplorer
ANSYS EKM
ANSYS Explicit STR
ANSYS Fluent
ANSYS Fluent Meshing or Tgrid
ANSYS HFSS
ANSYS ICEM CFD
ANSYS Icepak
ANSYS LS-DYNA
ANSYS Maxwell
ANSYS Mechanical
ANSYS Mechanical APDL
ANSYS Meshing
ANSYS nCode DesignLife
ANSYS PExprt
ANSYS Polyflow
ANSYS Q3D Extractor
ANSYS Remote Solver Manager
ANSYS Simplorer
ANSYS SIwave
ANSYS SpaceClaim
ANSYS SpaceClaim Direct Modeler
ANSYS TurboGrid
ANSYS Workbench
System Coupling

 

AutoCAD Map 3D enriches your map data, making it more visual and intelligent. Join Gordon Luckett in this course, where he shows how to use this powerful program to edit data within existing AutoCAD drawings and connect to outside databases for new sources of information. He'll also show how to connect to, style, and analyze GIS data, and publish your data and final maps to a web-based map book. All of this and more is possible with AutoCAD Map 3D. Start watching, and learn what it has in store for your organization.

Topics include:

Creating object data definitions
Modifying object data
Attaching source drawings
Performing queries
Adding images
Styling drawing data
Importing and exporting GIS data
Connecting to GIS data
Styling, editing, and analyzing GIS data
Merging and splitting GIS data
Using coordinate systems
Publishing map books

$30

By 3D printing scale models, architects can save time, troubleshoot problems, and fully illustrate their ideas in three dimensions. In this course, Kacie Hultgren takes you through the steps of transforming your 2D architectural drawings into a 3D model printed on a MakerBot 3D printer. The course reviews AutoCAD's 3D modeling tools and commands, and pays special attention to necessary adaptations and settings for successful 3D prints.

$30

This project-based AutoCAD course is perfect for flexing your 3D modeling skills. Learn to master a wide variety of AutoCAD's 3D tools while modeling a complex spiral staircase. Author Kacie Hultgren shows how to extrude 3D steps from a 2D layout, draw on faces, create chamfered edges, and build out the complete staircase from 3D blocks, primitives, and sweeps. The course covers multiple approaches to the same tasks, so you can tailor the techniques to your own workflow.

$30

Take your drawings from 2D to 3D with AutoCAD. Author Scott Onstott helps build your AutoCAD 2015 skills, one video at a time. You’ll learn to extrude 2D plans into solid objects, cut out wall openings and add doors and windows, build 3D staircases, and model a complex roof surface. You’ll also discover how to create a 3D tower and sculpt the surrounding landscape with NURBS surfaces. At the end of this course, you’ll have modeled a complete 3D town hall based on an archetypal midcentury design.

$30

You can model almost any form imaginable with AutoCAD’s surface toolset. In this project-based course, Scott Onstott teaches you all the techniques required to solve complex modeling challenges in AutoCAD, while focusing on an innovative ebike design. Learn to create each 3D component of the bicycle model, including its frame, belt-tensioner mechanism, drivetrain, electric-assist power components, brakes, wheels, axels, hubs, spokes, handlebars, and even the bicycle seat. The techniques (which can be applied to other mechanical models) cover extruding profiles, lofting 2D cross sections, revolving profiles around an axis, filleting edges, smoothing meshes into organic forms, and sculpting complex NURBS surfaces.

$30

Designers and engineers often work together on products, architectural and engineering projects, signage, and product packaging. They don't use the same software, but they have to share assets to get the job done. This course provides a variety of options for sharing and exchanging files between the designer's home turf, Illustrator, and CAD programs like AutoCAD and SketchUp. Author William Everhart shows how to export CAD files, open them in Illustrator, and handle conversion issues. And vice versa: He'll also show how to prep Illustrator files for conversion to the CAD format, and provide some workarounds for using PDF and SVG files.
Topics include:
*Working with scale drawings
*Opening DWG and DXF files with Illustrator
*Importing files from SketchUp
*Preparing Illustrator artwork for export
*Using plugins in Illustrator

$30

AutoCAD MEP helps you build the systems—mechanical, electrical, and plumbing—that connect buildings to the outside world. This course will help you draft, design, and document these systems using MEP’s powerful toolset. Author Eric Wing touches on project setup, as well as external referencing and display configurations, before diving into individual modeling scenarios. In one chapter, he’ll show how to create electrical power plans and lighting plans with receptacles and lighting fixtures. In the next, it’s a mechanical plan, with rooftop units, VAV boxes, ducts, and diffusers. Last, you’ll work on a plumbing plan and system. Then he ties the drawings together with smart tags and schedules, and creates section and elevation versions of your plans. Dive in now and learn to eliminate tedious drawing tasks while creating more accurate documentation with MEP.

$30

AutoCAD is the leader in CAD drafting, and architects around the world use AutoCAD Architecture for modeling their buildings. In this course, author and teacher Paul F. Aubin will take you through the tools and techniques used by professional architects to build amazing structures with this product. Learn how to lay out simple floor plans with wall objects, which automatically form clean joints, and add windows and doors that intelligently cut wall openings. Then discover how to change the style of walls and the graphics to display all types of drawings—from small scale to large, 2D to 3D—with the click of a button. Paul will also show you how to create documentation like site plans, elevations, and sections, complete with schedules and tags.

$30

Scott Onstott has been using AutoCAD for 24 years and has witnessed its evolution into the world-leading application for
computer-aided drafting and design. You too can harness its power and start creating detailed CAD drawings whatever your field:
design architecture or engineering. In this in-depth course Scott shows you how to draw precise measured 2D drawings-the basis of design communication the world over. Then he shows how to create and modify geometry layers blocks attributes dimensions and layouts and finally how to start sharing your drawings with others.

Topics include:
Changing workspaces
Converting drawings to new units
Drawing lines circles splines polygons and more
Moving copying rotating and scaling objects
Mirroring lengthening trimming and joining objects
Drawing accurately with coordinates and snapping
Creating gradients
Making dimension objects
Managing object and layer properties
Reusing content
Making external references
Adding annotations
Packaging and publishing CAD data

$30

 

$30

Throughout this AutoCAD tutorial we'll explore the use of 2D drafting tools to produce a professional commercial site design with civil engineering plan production.

We'll start by using an appropriate drawing template for civil engineering projects using the US Imperial dimensional units, and we'll also reference our existing conditions survey that is set to a real-world coordinate system.

We'll then pull in the project architect's building design and begin laying out the surrounding site features such as sidewalks, access drives, and parking areas. We'll finish by setting up a plan sheet, dimensioning the site features, adding text and leader annotations and plotting our plans to PDF files.

By the end of this AutoCAD training, you'll have a strong focus on drafting and design efficiency by using the appropriate AutoCAD draw or modify tools for the job at hand.

$30

In this set of AutoCAD tutorials you'll learn how to annotate your architectural drawings using the annotation tools available to you in AutoCAD.We'll begin with dimensions, where we'll learn how to place and customize dimensions to fit your own annotation style.

Next we'll work with single line text where we'll create our own custom style to label the function and area of each space. Once we've finished working with dimensions and text, we'll take a look at how to work with tables and blocks to create simple door and wall construction schedules.

By the end of this AutoCAD training you'll know how to work with labeling tools available to you within your annotation tab and you'll be able better communicate the details of your plan with and easy to read and professional style.

$30

In this AutoCAD tutorial we'll learn how to draw a reflected ceiling plan. We'll begin our project by doing a little prep work with a referenced floor plan. We'll delete any items in the plan that may distract from the ceiling.

Once we've cleaned up floor plan, we'll learn how to create symbols representing the various elements in the ceiling design. After creating the symbols we'll then draw the various types of ceilings for each space within our plan.

Next, we’ll place the symbols we created onto the ceilings in the floor plan. Finally we'll add some notes and create a symbols legend to make the plan even easier to understand.

By the end of this AutoCAD training you'll know how to create the various symbols normally included in reflected ceiling plans, and also learn how to create a symbols legend using tables.

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll learn how to apply various types of constraints to geometry within AutoCAD.

We'll begin with Geometric Constraints where we'll look at each type and see how we can then apply it to a structural diagram. Once we've covered each Geometric Constraint, we'll then learn about Dimensional Constraints. We'll apply linear, aligned and even angular constraints to our drawing in order to maintain certain geometric and dimensional characteristics.

Finally, we'll take a look at Auto Constrain and Inferring Constraints and some of the benefits and limitations of using one or the other. By the end of this tutorial, you'll gain a solid understanding of how constraints can help take your drawings from simple 2D linework to a more parametric approach to drafting and design.

$30

In this series of tutorials we learn how to take CAD drawings and designs and organize them on sheets using
layouts and viewports.

We’ll begin by loading a title block template from within the AutoCAD sample files. From there we’ll add
important information regarding our project and firm to the title block. Next we’ll learn how to quickly add
viewports that we can scale, resize and even copy.

Finally we’ll add some drawing titles to each view and discuss the difference between annotative and standard
text. By the end of this tutorial you’ll know how to take your concepts and designs and organize them on
sheets for presentations and even construction documents.

$30

Throughout this series of tutorials we will learn how to work in AutoCAD.

We will use different drawing tools and options in the user interface, such as lines, guides, modifiers and layers, and also explore working in the 2D and the 3D environment.

Then, we'll learn how to use the different features of the software to draw a floor plan, several 3D models and put them all together into one final 3D model where we can explore different options using view styles.

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll take a look at how managing line weights properly can help you create easy to read, professional looking drawings in AutoCAD.

We'll begin by making sure our layers are set and all line work is assigned to the proper layer. From there, we'll assign color to our layers so that line work can be differentiated visually through color. Next we'll adjust Lineweights to direct the reader's focus on what's most important in the drawing. From there, we'll adjust Linetype for things like topography lines and property lines. Finally we'll learn how to use Plot Styles to choose how we want our drawing to appear once it's printed.

By the end of this training you'll know how to use layers, color, Line weight, type and scale to enhance your drawings.

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll learn how to speed your production time using your Tools Palette in AutoCAD. We'll begin by locating and conceptually breaking down the tools palette and all it's features.

From there we'll work in the Civil and Architectural tabs to work on a site plan. Next we'll see how we can use structure tab to help speed things along when working on structural plans like columns grids and details. Next we'll work with a simple floor plan where we'll add windows to the plan as well as edit and customize the window blocks to fit the sizing in our project.

Finally, we'll use the annotate tab to create tags and schedules as well as to add a title to our drawing. By the end of this training you'll gain an appreciation for how these simple tools can reduce your production time by utilizing the blocks from your Tools Palette.

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll learn how to use AutoCAD. We'll begin by getting familiar with the User Interface.

We'll discuss how things are broken down into tabs, ribbons, and panels and we'll take a look at the 2D and 3D user interface and tools we have accessible to us. Once we've get comfortable with the interface, we'll then look at the how to use your drawing, modification and annotation tools in both the 2D and 3D work spaces.

Along the way we'll discuss a few tips that will help you work with precision when creating your drawings. By the end of this training you'll have a solid understand of how to to use AutoCAD to bring your ideas to life with ease and precision.

01. Introduction and project overview
02. The AutoCAD user interface
03. Continuing with the interface
04. Using the Navigation and Status Bar
05. Drawing with the Line tool
06. Specifying length and angles
07. Working with Polylines
08. Modifying line work
09. Using Fillet, Scale and Array
10. Drawing a small space
11. Applying Hatch Patterns to drawings
12. Using Layers to organize your drawings
13. Working with Layer Properties
14. Layer visibility
15. Adding dimensions and text to your drawings
16. Getting familiar with 3D functionality
17. Making shapes in the 3D Basics Workspace
18. Getting familiar with the 3D Modeling Workspace
19. Surface modeling
20. Mesh modeling
21. Taking a look at the Rendering capabilities

$30

In this set of tutorials, we'll take a step by step approach to drawing a lumber construction detail. We'll start from the ground up and begin with the foundation. We'll learn how to use Polylines and Hatching to get the foundation in place.

Next, we'll draw the sill plate and studs included in the detail. While we draw each element in the detail, we'll be sure to manage our Linetypes, Layers and Hatch Patterns accordingly in order to create a well organized drawing. Finally, we'll add some text and leaders to reinforce the graphic components of our drawing.

By the end of this tutorial you'll have a solid understanding of how to draw a simple lumber construction detail using mainly Polylines and Hatch Patterns. You'll also learn to create a drawing that is well organized, detailed and professional looking. So with that I'm ready to get started and I'll meet you in the next lesson!


01. Introduction and project overview
02. Drawing the foundation using Polylines
03. Drawing sheathing and gypsum board
04. Drawing the sill plate and fastener
05. Using a Linetype for insulation
06. Using Polylines to draw the siding
07. Using a Linetype to draw the siding fasteners
08. Using Hatch Patterns to define materials
09. Adding Multileaders and text to the plan

$30

In this series of tutorials we'll learn how to draw and position furniture and fixture symbols throughout a floor plan. We'll begin our project with a floor plan that only includes walls, windows and doors.

Our objective will be to populate the kitchen by creating the furniture, fixtures and appliances that help support all the functions of that space. We'll learn how to use Polylines and number of commands like Offset, Trim and Copy to create each symbol. Once the symbols are created we'll learn how to create a symbols library so that you can access and reuse the symbols you've just created, saving you a ton of time in your work flow for future projects.

$30

Throughout this training we'll take the creative path of an architect and develop a set of design drawings from an initial hand sketch. This tutorial will not only teach you the essential technical skills of drawing architectural plans in AutoCAD and Photoshop, but also give you insight into the creative thinking process that goes into making strategic design decisions.
By the end of the training you will have gained advanced techniques that will boost your ability to create your own impressive design presentations.

01. Introduction and project overview
02. Discussing presentation methods
03. Reviewing presentation examples
04. Setting up our initial workspace
05. Importing hand sketches into AutoCAD
06. Importing and refining site plans
07. Using layers and templates
08. Importing Plot Styles
09. Drawing the first lines
10. Drawing walls and labeling grids
11. Drawing secondary walls and slab edges
12. Creating blocks for repeated objects
13. Spacing columns and window frames
14. Editing arrays
15. Drawing sliding doors
16. Editing the lounge design
17. Drawing a spiral staircase
18. Adding text labels, floor heights, and dimensions
19. Adding conventions to stairs
20. Making large scale changes to plans
21. Adding a room to your plans
22. Beginning to draw the upper floor
23. Drawing the master suite
24. Finding and importing furniture blocks
25. Drawing kitchens and bedrooms
26. Adding trees, plants, and landscape
27. Showing what is above and below
28. Setting up sections and elevations
29. Rotating the view in plan using UCS
30. Drawing the first lines in section
31. Drawing the upper floor in section
32. Finishing the section
33. Speeding up the drawing of new elevations
34. Drawing a section line from a contour plan
35. Preparing plans for printing
36. Fine tuning printable layouts
37. Plotting files in layers
38. Compositing the plotted CAD layers
39. Rendering the walls and floors
40. Adding drop shadows around furniture
41. Rendering the landscape and driveway
42. Rendering the section and elevation
43. Creating title blocks

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll explore how to create and manipulate 3D geometry using AutoCAD. We'll begin by learning how to create basic solid geometry. From there we'll take a look at a few tools that will help you manipulate your solid in order create that form or object you have in mind.
Next we'll move our attention to surfaces where we'll learn how to create and edit those surfaces in order to create complex geometric forms. Finally, we'll take a look at working with meshes and how we can create free flowing forms by manipulating faces, edges and vertices.
By the end of this training you should have a thorough understanding of how to create complex geometry that you wouldn't normally be able to generate when using traditional 2D drafting tools and techniques.


01. Introduction and project overview
02. Creating 3D solids using primitives
03. Using solid extrusion tools to generate forms
04. Manipulating solid geometry
05. Creating surfaces
06. Continuing with surface creation
07. Using the Revolve and Patch tools to create a surface
08. Working with meshes in AutoCAD

$30

In this set of tutorials, we'll take an in-depth look at working with materials in AutoCAD. We'll begin by breaking down the tools and tasks you have access to in your Materials Browser. We'll learn how to search for and assign materials that are included in your AutoDesk Library. We'll even take it one step further and learn a couple ways to create your own materials as wells as how to start your own Library.
From there, we'll learn how to edit the materials using settings like reflectivity and cutouts to name a few.
Next we'll look at Textures where we'll learn how to edit and scale existing textures as well as import images to create our own.
By the end of this training you'll have in depth knowledge of how to use and manipulate materials so that you can bring your concepts to life using AutoCAD.


01. Introduction and project overview
02. Getting familiar with your Materials Browser
03. Editing your materials
04. Setting up a new Materials Library
05. Using the Texture Editor
06. Creating custom textures with imported images

$30

In this set of tutorials, we’ll walk through your first day rendering in AutoCAD.

We’ll begin with the basics and explore the effects of a basic render. We’ll then dig even deeper and get familiar with the user interface as well as some commonly used presets that will help you achieve the look and feel you have in mind.

Along the way we’ll explore additional tools like lighting and the materials browser, that can help you achieve a more realistic looking image or scene. By the end of this training you’ll be able to set up a scene, work with lighting, apply materials and save your rendered image.

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll use 3D modeling tools in AutoCAD to create a structural study model.

We'll begin with a column grid diagram that we'll import as an external reference. We'll then use Polylines to trace and extrude the footings and foundation from the 2D plan.

Once the foundation is in place we'll then trace and extrude the building core as well as the columns in the plan. We'll take a look at couple shortcuts and tricks along the way that will save you time and also make working with AutoCAD's 3D tools a breeze.

We'll finish the training by exploring the Tool Palette as well as creating some lateral bracing

for the model.

01. Introduction and project overview
02. Using the Extrude command to model the foundation
03. Creating the building core with the Extrude command
04. Creating columns using Polylines and Extrusions
05. Creating beams with Polylines and Extrusions
06. Creating lateral bracing using Polylines

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll use the Tool Palette and a few basic drawing and annotation tools to layout a column grid in AutoCAD.

We'll begin with the basic shell of a building and start setting layers for all the elements in the column grid. We'll make sure to assign names and colors to each layer so that our diagram will be well organized.

Next, we'll set a specific line type for the grid line layer and begin drawing the grid lines. Once the lines are in place we'll then load a column from the Tools Palette and place columns in their correct position through out the plan.

Finally, we'll annotate the column grid by adding bubbles and text and any other finishing touches we may need to get the job done right.

$30

In this set of tutorials you'll learn how to draw a stair detail in AutoCAD.
We'll begin the project by using Polylines to draw the basic form of the treads. Once we have the form in place we'll then draw the stringers and landing. We'll finish out the drawing by adding some handrails and balusters as well as text and dimensions.While working with our drawing we'll be sure to adhere to the code requirements which can be found in the International Building Code.
By the end of this training you'll have a solid understanding of what it takes to draw a professional looking and code compliant stair detail for your permit set of drawings.

01.Introduction and project summary 00:48
02.Drawing the tread and risers for the stairs 06:27
03.Drawing the stringers and landing for the stairs 05:02
04.Working with z-pan blocks for the treads 05:59
05.Drawing connection pieces along the stringer 06:31
06.Drawing handrails 06:14
07.Drawing glass panels 05:24
8.Finishing the handrails and glass panels 04:55
9.Drawing the second run of the staircase 07:45
10.Adding hatch patterns to the glass 04:14
11.Adding text and dimensions 07:50

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll learn how to create a 3D furniture layout using the 3D tools in AutoCAD.
We'll begin the process by importing and arranging some 2D furniture blocks to create a living room layout. We'll also extrude a few walls from the floor plan to create the 3D room. Next we'll create 3D furniture that we'll arrange according to the floor plan we created in the previous step.
By the end of this training you'll gain a solid understanding of how to create 3D furniture pieces and how to use them to create an installation plan.

01.Introduction and project overviewWat ch it now 00:46
02.Extruding walls from a 2D floor plan07:38
03.Using 2D furniture blocks to create a layout 06:36
04.Creating a 3D chair 07:30
05.Applying material to the 3D chair 05:27
06.Creating a 3D coffee table 07:03
07.Creating 3D floor lamps 04:53
08.Adding materials to the floor finish and area rug 04:59

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll learn how to draw a wall and foundation detail in AutoCAD.
We'll begin the process with the foundation where we'll use layers, lines and hatch patterns to create the different elements of our foundation system. From there, we'll take a similar approach and draw the wall system as well as any structural connections.
Finally, we'll look at a few ways to use line weights and line color to give your drawing a clean and easy to read look.

$30

In this set of tutorials we'll use parameters to create dynamic blocks in order to add windows to our elevation drawing. We'll get started by creating some blocks of a few window types from our design.
We'll learn how to work with parameters and actions in order to create a flexible block. We'll apply stretch parameters as well a list of multiple sizes for future projects. By the end of this course

you'll have an understanding of how parameters work and you should be very comfortable with applying the stretch parameter and action. So with that I'm ready to started and I'll see you in the next lesson.

01. Introduction and project summary00:43
02. Discussing the benefits of parameters in AutoCAD05:49
03. Creating blocks05:50
04. Working in the Block Editor06:52
05. Applying parameters to blocks06:05
06. Working with the first and second floor windows04:49
07. Adding the dynamic blocks to the facade06:11

$30

In this set of tutorials, we'll take a step by step approach to creating a site plan for a residential property.
We'll begin by importing a building footprint that also displays the first floor plan. We'll then begin drawing property lines, driveways, landscaping elements as well as utility easements. Next we'll focus our attention to what's going on outside of the site and draw as well as label surrounding properties and buildings. We'll also use a simple technique to create unique looking trees and shrubs throughout the site.
Finally we'll add text and Multileaders to call out elements within our plan and to better tell the story of our site.
By the end of this training you'll gain an understanding what elements to include in your site plan as well
as how to draw them.

01. Introduction and project overview00:58
02. Drawing the building footprint and property line05:48
03. Adding surrounding properties and lot lines06:12
04. Drawing a fence for the site plan09:17
05. Adding surrounding buildings05:25
06. Drawing unique looking trees for the site plan07:39
07. Drawing shrubs for the site plan09:08
08. Drawing curb cuts for driveways07:56
09. Finishing the sidewalks and driveways05:52
10. Using the Hatch command for grass07:40
11. Drawing utility easements06:45
12. Finishing up with utilities04:08
13. Adding dimensions and text to the site plan09:03
14. Making adjustments and adding text06:30
15. Drawing a north arrow and finishing touches08:43

$30

In this set of tutorials I'll walk you through creating your first working drawing that you can attach to your construction documents.

We'll begin by creating the basic form of the section we want to detail. From there we'll take an organized approach to drawing by setting and naming the layers of each element we plan to include in the drawing. We'll start with the exterior brick wall and work our way in towards the interior. We'll learn how to add hatching and line work that will make our drawing easy to read. From there we'll learn how to detail a roof as well as some of the structural components that hold it together.

Finally we'll put some finishing touches on the drawing by adding text and leaders to label each element within our drawing.With these tools and tips I'm confident you'll be able start putting together your working drawings with ease and little time invested.


01. Introduction and project overview
02. Drawing a roof plan
03. Finishing the roof plan
04. Drawing the basic form of the roof and wall
05. Refining the brick veneer detail
06. Adding hatch patterns to grout and brick
07. Drawing the sheathing and studs
08. Refining the wall detail
09. Drawing insulation for the walls and ceiling
10. Detailing the roof
11. Refining the roof detail
12. Adding connection details
13. Adding text and leaders to your drawing
14. Adding break-lines to our drawing

$30

In this set of tutorials, you'll learn how to draw your very first set of architectural plans. We'll get started by working on a floor plan of a residential project.

We'll begin with the exterior and interior walls in our plan. We'll learn a few tools and tips that will help us quickly and efficiently draw walls that will define each space throughout the plan. Next we'll learn how to quickly draw the doors and windows that will populate our floor plan.

Once the floor plan is complete, we'll then focus our attention on how to create elevation drawings of the home we're designing and we'll also learn some tips on how to add depth to your drawings.

01. Introduction and project overview 00:49
02. Drawing the exterior walls of the floor plan 06:32
03. Drawing the interior walls of the floor plan 05:02
04. Completing the interior walls 04:47
05. Drawing doors 06:20
06. Finishing the door placement 08:08
07. Drawing wall openings for windows and entrances 07:11
08. Drawing windows05:42
09. Creating a Block for windows 06:24
10. Adding hatch patterns, text and dimensions 07:57
11. Setting layers and lineweights for elevations 05:15
12. Drawing the basic form of the elevation 06:10
13. Cleaning lines and refining elevations 03:11
14. Assigning lineweights to the elevation drawing 04:18
15. Drawing doors in elevation view 06:48
16. Completing the door 07:49
17. Adding hatch patterns to elevations 06:22

 

In this project-based Learning Autodesk AutoCAD 3D 2015 video tutorial series, you'll quickly have relevant skills for real-world applications.
Follow along with our expert instructor in this training course to get:
Concise, informative and broadcast-quality Learning Autodesk AutoCAD 3D 2015 training videos delivered to your desktop
The ability to learn at your own pace with our intuitive, easy-to-use interface
A quick grasp of even the most complex Learning Autodesk AutoCAD 3D 2015 subjects because they're broken into simple, easy to follow tutorial videos
Practical working files further enhance the learning process and provide a degree of retention that is unmatched by any other form of Learning Autodesk AutoCAD 3D 2015 tutorial, online or offline... so you'll know the exact steps for your own projects.

$30

In this project-based Learning AutoCAD Civil 3D 2015 video tutorial series, you'll quickly have relevant skills for real-world applications.

Follow along with our expert instructor in this training course to get:

  • Concise, informative and broadcast-quality Learning AutoCAD Civil 3D 2015 training videos delivered to your desktop
  • The ability to learn at your own pace with our intuitive, easy-to-use interface
  • A quick grasp of even the most complex Learning AutoCAD Civil 3D 2015 subjects because they're broken into simple, easy to follow tutorial videos
$30

In this project-based Learning Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical 2015 video tutorial series, you'll quickly have relevant skills for real-world applications.

Follow along with our expert instructor in this training course to get:

  • Concise, informative and broadcast-quality Learning Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical 2015 training videos delivered to your desktop
  • The ability to learn at your own pace with our intuitive, easy-to-use interface
  • A quick grasp of even the most complex Learning Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical 2015 subjects because they're broken into simple, easy to follow tutorial videos
$30

 

 

$30

Throughout these lessons we'll create and use representations for views, positions, and levels of detail in Inventor. We'll cover how to create different representations and use them in drawings.By the end of this tutorial, you will know when to create each type of representation and how to mix and match different representations.


01. Introduction and project overview
02. Establishing representations in Inventor
03. Setting up the project
04. Creating view representations
05. Using positional representations
06. Defining detail in our assemblies
07. Applying the Shrinkwrap tool
08. Implementing different drawing views
09. Exploring drive constraints in assemblies
10. Placing joint assembly constraints
11. Using Excel for positional representations
12. Generating exploding views
13. Improving performance in our sub-assembly
14. Modifying positional representations

$30

In this series of tutorials we will learn how to create a Presentation file from an assembly. We will also learn how to use Representations in assembly mode. The Representations include level of detail, views, and positions. A drawing will be created and basic drawing tools will be explained.

01. Introduction and project overview
02. Creating an assembly for the Presentation file
03. Exploring the Presentation file mode
04. Tweaking and animating Presentation files
05. Understanding Representations and why we need them
06. Representations Level of detail
07. Using Representation on a drawing
08. Creating additional views for drawing use
09. Adding views of your assembly
10. Exploring different ways to show our assembly
11. Drawing annotations
12. Checking out other drawing options

$30

In this series of lessons we will learn the layout of Inventor, how to sketch, how to create 3D parts, and the basics of assembly in Inventor.

Throughout these lessons we will learn the different toolbars. We will learn the basic sketch tools and how they work, as well as draw sketches and show how to constrain and dimension the sketch. Finally, we will turn the sketch into a 3D model and show how to prepare it for an assembly, as well as create two additional parts and create a basic 3D assembly.

Guest Tutor
Dan Halsell

1. Introduction and project overview 01:06
2. Layout, file types, and starting a sketch 05:45
3. Learning the sketch tools 10:30
4. Continuing with sketch tools 08:44
5. Constraining and dimensioning a sketch 10:35
6. Creating a sketch and turning it into a 3D model 10:06
7. 3D model tools 11:24
8. Continuing with 3D model tools 09:40
9. 3D model appearance and assembly preparation 08:17
10. Creating two new parts 10:21
11. Constraining all three parts together 06:42

 

$30

In this Autodesk Inventor 2015 training course, expert author Adam Cooper teaches you the fundamental tools and techniques needed to create your own 3D digital prototypes and modeling projects. This course is designed for the absolute beginner, meaning no prior experience with Inventor is required.

You will start with a tour of the Inventor 2015 user interface, and then jump into learning about basic sketching. Adam will teach you how to sketch basic features, such as creating an extrusion, secondary features, and work features. This video tutorial will teach you how to sketch advanced features, use parameters and equations, and work with duplication tools. You will then move into the assembly environment, learning how to build an assembly from the parts you created, interact with the assembly, and create a presentation view of the assembly. Finally, you will cover basic view creation and dimensioning methods.

Once you have completed this computer based training course, you will have a comprehensive understanding of how to use the tools in Inventor 2015 to create your own modeling projects. Working files are included, allowing you to follow along with the author throughout the lessons.

$30

In this Mastering Autodesk Inventor – Advanced Assemblies training course, expert author Adam Cooper will teach advanced assembly techniques and how to manage large assemblies. This course is designed for users that already have a solid understanding of Inventor.

You will start by learning how to work with large assemblies, then jump into learning about advanced constraints, such as flexible components and transitional constraints. Adam will teach you about positional representations, as well as the level of detail representations. This video tutorial will also cover the frame generator and weldments environments in Inventor.

Once you have completed this video based training course, you will be fully capable of creating your own assemblies in Inventor using these advanced techniques. Working files are included, allowing you to follow along with the author throughout the lessons.

$30

In this Inventor Configured Design training course, expert author Adam Cooper teaches you all about the key configurations in Autodesk Inventor. This course is designed for users that already have a working knowledge of Inventor.

You will start by learning about iFeatures, including how to create and edit an iFeature, various application options, and copying Features vs. iFeatures. Adam will then teach you about creating iParts, including iPart documentation, updating, and content center publishing. This video tutorial will talk about iAssemblies, showing you how to create basic iAssemblies, multi-level iAssemblies, and how to document and update iAssemblies. Finally, you will learn about iLogic, rule options and wizards, and conditional statements.

Once you have completed this video based training course, you will have an in-depth knowledge of how to create the various configurations in Inventor. Working files are included, allowing you to follow along with the author throughout the lessons.

$30

In this project-based Mastering Autodesk Inventor - Sheet Metal Design video tutorial series, you'll quickly have relevant skills for real-world applications.

Follow along with our expert instructor in this training course to get:
Concise, informative and broadcast-quality Autodesk Inventor - Sheet Metal Design training videos delivered to your desktop
The ability to learn at your own pace with our intuitive, easy-to-use interface
A quick grasp of even the most complex Autodesk Inventor - Sheet Metal Design subjects because they're broken into simple, easy to follow tutorial videos

Practical working files further enhance the learning process and provide a degree of retention that is unmatched by any other form of Autodesk Inventor - Sheet Metal Design tutorial, online or offline... so you'll know the exact steps for your own projects.

 

$30

Already up and running? This course is the next step in building your Autodesk Inventor skillset. Author John Helfen takes you through the interface and key processes of this parametric design system, including sketching, part modeling, assemblies, and drawings. Each process works in conjunction with the rest, allowing you to create parts and assemblies and document them in a way that they can be manufactured. Learn how to set up your project file; create and modify geometry; create extrusions, sweeps, and lofts; build parts with placed features and patterns of features; and create iParts and iFeatures. John also covers assembly visualization techniques, drawing views, and balloons and parts lists.

$30

This course introduces you to the interface and key processes of Inventor,
the parametric design system from Autodesk. Author John Helfen covers
sketching, part modeling, assemblies, and drawings. These tasks work in
conjunction, allowing you to create parts and assemblies and document them
in a way so that the manufacturing process proceeds faster and more
efficiently.

Topics include:

Navigating drawings with the View Cube and other navigation tools
Sketching geometry
Dimensioning parts
Creating parameters
Drawing circles, squares, and other shapes
Creating extrusions
Creating and managing constraints in assemblies
Setting basic drawing dimensions

 

 

Digital Tutors - Modeling Trusses in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Curtain Wall Systems in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Roof Formations Structures and Materials in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Using the Reinforcement Panel in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Renovation Projects in Revit $30
Digital-Tutors - Working with Revit Structural Analysis Tools $30
Digital-Tutors - Working in the Construction Template in Revit $30
Digital-Tutors - Working with Materials in Revit 2015 $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Parametric Suspension Bridge Concept Model in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating Organic Forms Using Adaptive Modeling Techniques in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Designing Electrical Circuits in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Advanced Modeling Tools in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling a Large Multi-Level Parking Structure in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Preparing Views for Competition Boards in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating Section Drawings in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Redlining and Mark-ups in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Using Exterior Lighting to Create a Night Scene Rendering in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Custom Staircase in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Your First Day Rendering in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Working with DWG Files in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Light Gauge Steel in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Plumbing Systems in Revit MEP $30
Digital Tutors - Setting Construction Phases in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Precast Concrete Structures in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Energy Simulation in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Compound and Stacked Walls in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling a Steel Structure in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Designing and Documenting a Building in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Introduction to Space Planning and Design in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Site Analysis in Revit $30

 

Digital Tutors - Modeling Trusses in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Curtain Wall Systems in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Roof Formations Structures and Materials in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Using the Reinforcement Panel in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Renovation Projects in Revit $30
Digital-Tutors - Working with Revit Structural Analysis Tools $30
Digital-Tutors - Working in the Construction Template in Revit $30
Digital-Tutors - Working with Materials in Revit 2015 $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Parametric Suspension Bridge Concept Model in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating Organic Forms Using Adaptive Modeling Techniques in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Designing Electrical Circuits in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Advanced Modeling Tools in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling a Large Multi-Level Parking Structure in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Preparing Views for Competition Boards in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating Section Drawings in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Redlining and Mark-ups in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Using Exterior Lighting to Create a Night Scene Rendering in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Custom Staircase in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Your First Day Rendering in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Working with DWG Files in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Light Gauge Steel in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Plumbing Systems in Revit MEP $30
Digital Tutors - Setting Construction Phases in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Precast Concrete Structures in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Energy Simulation in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Compound and Stacked Walls in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling a Steel Structure in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Designing and Documenting a Building in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Introduction to Space Planning and Design in Revit $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Site Analysis in Revit $30

 

Lynda - Creating Revit Templates Contents $30
Lynda - Creating Revit Templates Views and Sheets $30
Lynda – Creating Revit Templates: Annotation $30
Lynda - Building Roofs with Revit $30
Lynda - Creating Concrete Buildings with Revit Structure $30
Lynda - Revit Architecture 2015 Essential Training $30
Lynda - Revit: Family Curves and Formulas $30
Lynda - Revit Construction Modeling Tools with Paul F. Aubin $30
Lynda – Revit for Interior Design: Interior Walls $30

 

 

Digital Tutors - Creating a Wheel Blade Bracket in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Exploring Options with the Swept Boss Base Feature in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Discovering the Use of Weldments and Sheet Metal Design in Solidworks $30
Digital Tutors - Designing a Windmill Tower from Photo Reference in Solidworks $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling a Press Frame Support Assembly in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Parametric Multi Bodied CAD Model in Solidworks $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Complex Surfaces for Product Design in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Modeling Options for Sketching, Features and Assemblies in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Creating Quick Sketch Models in Solidworks $30
Digital Tutors - Executing an In Context Assembly Design in Solidworks $30
Digital Tutors - Creating a Working Arbor Press in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Understanding the Versatility of Your Toolset in SolidWorks $30
Digital Tutors - Getting Started in SolidWorks $30

 

InfiniteSkills-Mastering SolidWorks 2015 - Rendering and Visualization Training Video $30
InfiniteSkills-SolidWorks - Animation Training Video $30
Infiniteskills-Learning SolidWorks 2015 - Drawing Tools Training Video $30
InfiniteSkills - Learning SolidWorks 2015 - Weldments Training Video $30
InfiniteSkills - Certified SolidWorks Associate (CSWA) Exam Training Video $30
Infiniteskills- SolidWorks 2015 - Sheet Metal Training Video $30
Infiniteskills-Learning SolidWorks 2015 Training Video $30
InfiniteSkills - Learning Automating Design With SolidWorks and DriveWorksXpress $30
InfiniteSkills-SolidWorks - Molded Part Design $30
InfiniteSkills – SolidWorks Electrical – Schematic Fundamentals $30
InfiniteSkills - SolidWorks Drawing Tools Training Video $30
InfiniteSKILLS - SolidWorks - Mold Tools Training Video $30

 

Lynda - Weldments with SolidWorks with Gabriel Corbett $30
Lynda - Sheet Metal with SolidWorks: Enclosure Design Project with Gabriel Corbett $30

 

SolidProfessor training for SolidWorks 2013 collection $120

 

Content:

SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Advanced Assemblies
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Advanced Parts
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Core Concepts
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: CSWA-CSWP-CSWE Prep Course
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Drawings
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: DriveWorksXpress
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: File Management
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Intro to eDrawings
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Mold Tools And Plastic Design
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: PhotoView 360
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Sheet Metal
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: SimulationXpress
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: SolidWorks for Beginners
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Solidworks Simulation
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Surfacing Essentials
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: TotAnalyst
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Toolbox and Design Library
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Update Training
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Visualization and Appearance
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Weldments

SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: CAMWorksMill
SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: CAMWorksTurn

SolidProfessor for SolidWorks 2013: Case Studies - Parts And Assemblies

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Copyright ©2005-2016 AEDSoftware.com